Asus TW510-E2 Service Manual
Dual AMD Opteron Dual AMD Opteron Dual AMD Opteron Dual AMD Opteron Dual AMD Opteron ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Pedestal/5U Pedestal/5U Pedestal/5U Pedestal/5U Pedestal/5U Rackmount Server Rackmount Server Rackmount Server Rackmount Server Rackmount Server Service Guide Service Guide Service Guide Service Guide Service Guide TW510-E2
ii ii ii ii ii Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). ASUS provides this manual âÂÂas isâ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, officers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product. Specifications and information contained in this manual ae furnished for informational use only, and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it. Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair, modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe. E1976 E1976 E1976 E1976 E1976 First edition V1 First edition V1 First edition V1 First edition V1 First edition V1 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Notices ............................................................................................... vii Safety information ............................................................................ viii About this guide ................................................................................. ix Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 System package contents .................................................... 1-2 1.2 System specifications .......................................................... 1-3 1.2 System specifications .......................................................... 1-4 1.3 Front panel features ............................................................. 1-5 1.4 Rear panel features .............................................................. 1-6 1.5 Internal features ................................................................... 1-7 1.6 LED information .................................................................... 1-8 Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2.1 Chassis cover ....................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Removing the side cover ........................................ 2-2 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover ...................................... 2-3 2.2 Motherboard information ...................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-5 2.3.1 Overview ................................................................. 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-5 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan ................................ 2-7 2.4 System memory ................................................................... 2-9 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................. 2-9 2.4.2 Memory Configurations ......................................... 2-10 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-11 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-11 2.5 Front panel assembly ......................................................... 2-12 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly ..................... 2-12 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly ................... 2-13 2.6 5.25-inch drives ................................................................. 2-14 2.7 Hard disk drives .................................................................. 2-17 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD ........................... 2-17 2.7.2 Installing an internal SATA HDD ........................... 2-19 2.8 Expansion cards .................................................................. 2-23 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-23 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card ................................ 2-24
iv iv iv iv iv Contents 2.9 Cable connections .............................................................. 2-25 2.9.1 Motherboard connections ..................................... 2-25 2.9.2 SATA backplane connections ............................... 2-26 2.10 Removable components ..................................................... 2-29 2.10.1 Chassis fan ........................................................... 2-29 2.10.2 HDD fan ................................................................ 2-31 2.10.3 SATA backplane ................................................... 2-34 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive ................................................... 2-36 2.10.5 Front I/O board .................................................... 2-38 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels ...................... 2-40 2.10.7 Power suppy unit .................................................. 2-42 Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Installation options Installation options Installation options Installation options Installation options Preparing the system for rack mounting .............................. 3-2 Removing the footpads or roller wheels ............................... 3-2 Removing the top cover ....................................................... 3-2 Attaching the rack rails ........................................................ 3-2 Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Motherboard info Motherboard info Motherboard info Motherboard info Motherboard info 4.1 Motherboard layout .............................................................. 4-2 4.2 Jumpers ................................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Internal connectors .............................................................. 4-7 Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: BIOS information BIOS information BIOS information BIOS information BIOS information 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 5-2 5.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 5-2 5.1.2 Updating the BIOS .................................................. 5-3 5.1.3 Saving the current BIOS file .................................... 5-5 5.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 5-6 5.1.5 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 5-8 5.1.6 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 5-9 5.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 5-12 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 5-13 5.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 5-13 5.2.3 Legend bar ........................................................... 5-14 5.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 5-14 5.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 5-14
v v v v v Contents 5.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 5-14 5.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 5-15 5.2.8 General help .......................................................... 5-15 5.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 5-16 5.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 5-16 5.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 5-16 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 5-16 5.3.4 Floppy 3 Mode Support ........................................ 5-16 5.3.5 Base/Extended/Total Memory .............................. 5-16 5.3.6 Primary IDE Master ............................................... 5-17 5.3.7 Primary IDE Slave .................................................. 5-19 5.3.8 Secondary IDE Master ........................................... 5-19 5.3.9 Secondary IDE Slave ............................................. 5-19 5.3.10 Third IDE Master ................................................... 5-20 5.3.11 Fourth IDE Master ................................................. 5-20 5.3.12 IDE Channel 4 Master ............................................ 5-20 5.3.13 IDE Channel 5 Master ............................................ 5-20 5.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 5-21 5.4.1 CPU Configuration ................................................. 5-21 5.4.2 Memory Configuration .......................................... 5-22 5.4.3 Chipset ................................................................. 5-24 5.4.4 Onboard Device .................................................... 5-26 5.4.5 PCIPnP ................................................................... 5-30 5.4.6 USB Configuration ................................................. 5-32 5.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 5-33 Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Driver installation Driver installation Driver installation Driver installation Driver installation 6.1 RAID configurations .............................................................. 6-2 6.1.1 Installing hard disks ................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 RAID configuration utility ........................................ 6-3 6.1.3 NVIDIA î RAID configurations .................................. 6-4 6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 6-11 6.3 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-13 6.4 Support CD information ...................................................... 6-14 6.4.1 Running the support CD ....................................... 6-14 6.4.2 Drivers menu ........................................................ 6-15
vi vi vi vi vi Contents 6.4.3 Management Software .......................................... 6-16 6.4.4 Utilities ................................................................. 6-16 6.5 Software information ......................................................... 6-18 6.5.1 Realtek Audio Control Panel ................................. 6-18 6.5.2 ASUS POST Reporter⢠.......................................... 6-25 6.5.3 Winbond Voice Editor ........................................... 6-27 Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Reference information Reference information Reference information Reference information Reference information A.1 600 W single power supply .................................................. A-2 A.1.1 General description ................................................. A-2 A.1.2 Specifications ......................................................... A-3 A.2 Simple fixes .......................................................................... A-4
vii vii vii vii vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
viii viii viii viii viii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged. ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your dealer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Any mechanical operation on this server must be conducted by certified or experienced engineers. ⢠Before operating the server, carefully read all the manuals included with the server package. ⢠Before using the server, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If any damage is detected, contact your dealer as soon as possible. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Place the server on a stable surface. Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturerâÂÂs instructions. CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Heavy System Heavy System Heavy System Heavy System Heavy System CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! This server system is heavy. Ask for assistance when moving or carrying the system. S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the userâÂÂs safety. Use the power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.
ix ix ix ix ix About this guide Audience Audience Audience Audience Audience This user guide is intended for system integrators and experienced users with at least basic knowledge of configuring a server. Contents Contents Contents Contents Contents This guide contains the following parts: 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction This chapter describes the general features of the barebone server, including sections on the front panel and rear panel specifications. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options This chapter describes how to prepare the barebone server for rack mounting. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation This chapter provides information on how to create a RAID set and how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone server supports. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information This appendix contains the power supply specifications and provides a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server.
x x x x x Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details. WARNING: WARNING: WARNING: WARNING: WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and information to aid in completing a task. Conventions Conventions Conventions Conventions Conventions To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.
1-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter describes the general features of the barebone server, including sections on the front panel and rear panel specifications. Chapter 1 Product introduction
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1.1 System package contents Check your system package for the following items. Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis ASUS AK25 5U rackmount chassis Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS K8N-DL motherboard Components Components Components Components Components 600 W single power supply SATA backplane board Front I/O board 52x CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive Floppy disk drive Chassis fan HDD fan CPU fan and heatsink assembly (x 2) Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables A C power cable SATA signal cable SATA power cable SMBus cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Hot-swap HDD trays (including HDD screws) Internal HDD rails (4 pairs) Chassis roller wheels (4 sets) System screws and cables Dummy covers System keys (2 pcs.) Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs TW510-E2 support CD with ASWM* Computer Associates î eTrust ⢠anti-virus CD Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation ASUS TW510-E2 user guide ASUS ASWM 2.0 user guide Optional items Optional items Optional items Optional items Optional items ASUS AK25 rackmount rail kit *ASUS System Web-based Management If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1.2 System specifications The ASUS TW510-E2 is a barebone server system featuring the ASUS K8N-DL motherboard. The server supports dual AMD Opteron⢠processors in 940-pin sockets, and includes the latest technologies through the chipsets embedded on the motherboard. Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis System System System System System dimension dimension dimension dimension dimension Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Storage and Storage and Storage and Storage and Storage and RAID RAID RAID RAID RAID LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 USB USB USB USB USB Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion slots slots slots slots slots Drive bays Drive bays Drive bays Drive bays Drive bays Pedestal or rackmount 5U with removable front door bezel and chassis foot stand or roller-wheels. 431 mm (H) x 220 mm (W) x 510 mm (D) ASUS K8N-DL (ATX compatible form factor: 12 in x 10.5 in) Dual Socket 940 for AMD Opteron⢠64 processors Supports AMD 64 architecture that enables simultaneous 32-bit and 64-bit computing NVIDIA î CK8-04 Professional Dual-channel memory architecture 6 x 184-pin DIMM sockets support registered ECC 400/333/266 MHz DDR memory modules Supports up to 24 GB system memory (tested only up to 12 GB on this motherboard due to 4 GB DDR availability) NVIDIA î CK8-04 Professional chipset supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 - 4 x SATA-II 3Gb/s drives - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, JBOD configurations BROADCOM î BMC5751 Gigabit PCI-E LAN controller Realtek î ALC850 8-channel CODEC Supports Universal Audio Jack (UAJ î ) Technology Supports Audio Sensing and Enumeration Technology 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port TI 1394a controller supports one IEEE 1394 port 4 x USB 2.0 ports (on the rear panel) 1 x PCI Express x16 slot 1 x PCI Express x1 slot 2 x PCI slots 1 x 3.25-inch FDD bay 3 x 5.25-inch drive bays (continued on the next page)
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1.2 System specifications Front panel Front panel Front panel Front panel Front panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Management Management Management Management Management Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware monitors monitors monitors monitors monitors Supported OS Supported OS Supported OS Supported OS Supported OS Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply 4 x USB ports 1 x IEEE 1394 port 1 x Headphone port (Line Out) 1 x Microphone port (Line In) 1 x Parallel port 1 x Serial port (COM1) 1 x IEEE 1394 port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical S/PDIF out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 8-channel audio ports ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) 2.0 Voltage, temperature, CPU and memory utilization, and fan speed monitoring Automatic Server Restart (ASR) feature Windows î 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4) Windows î XP Professional (Service Pack 2) 600 W power supply (with 24-pin and 8-pin power plugs) Refer to âÂÂChapter 4 Motherboard informationâ for details on the internal connectors.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1.3 Front panel features The TW510-E2 chassis displays a stylish front bezel with lock. The bezel covers the system components on the front panel and serves as security. Open the bezel to access the front panel components. The drive bays, power and reset buttons, LED indicators, optical drive, floppy drive, USB 2.0 ports, audio I/O ports, and an IEEE 1394 port are located on the front panel. For future installation of 5.25-inch devices, two drive bays are available. C C C C C D-ROM drive D-ROM drive D-ROM drive D-ROM drive D-ROM drive Security Security Security Security Security lock lock lock lock lock Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports To access front I/O ports and floppy disk drive without opening the bezel, hold the tab and move the sliding panel (rightmost panel) to the left as shown. Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Power button Power button Power button Power button Power button Reset button Reset button Reset button Reset button Reset button Message LED Message LED Message LED Message LED Message LED HDD access LED HDD access LED HDD access LED HDD access LED HDD access LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Floppy drive Floppy drive Floppy drive Floppy drive Floppy drive IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1.4 Rear panel features The rear panel includes a slot for the motherboard rear I/O ports, expansion slots, a chassis lock and intrusion switch, a vent for the system fan, and power supply module. Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port USB ports USB ports USB ports USB ports USB ports PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port Parallel port Parallel port Parallel port Parallel port Parallel port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port Serial port Serial port Serial port Serial port Serial port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Line In port Line In port Line In port Line In port Line In port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Microphone port Microphone port Microphone port Microphone port Microphone port Line Out port Line Out port Line Out port Line Out port Line Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Po Po Po Po Po wer connector wer connector wer connector wer connector wer connector Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Power supply module Power supply module Power supply module Power supply module Power supply module 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports (Refer to the description below.)
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1.5 Internal features The barebone server system includes the basic components as shown. 1. Power supply cage 2. Chassis fan 3. K8N-DL motherboard 4. Chassis intrusion switch 5. Expansion card locks 6. Optical drive 7. 2 x 5.25-inch drive bays 8. Hard disk drive cage 9. Front I/O board 10. HDD fan (inside) 11. SATA backplane (hidden) 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1.6 LED information The barebone server system comes with five LED indicators. Refer to the following table for the LED status description. LED LED LED LED LED Icon Icon Icon Icon Icon Display status Display status Display status Display status Display status Description Description Description Description Description System System System System System Power LED ON System power ON Blinking System is in suspend mode HDD Access LED OFF No activity Blinking Read/write data into the HDD Message LED OFF System is normal; no incoming event Blinking ASMS indicates a HW monitor event HDD bays HDD bays HDD bays HDD bays HDD bays Drive Status LED Green Bridge board connected to backplane Installed HDD is in good condition Red HDD failure Drive Activity LED Blinking Read/write data into the HDD ! Power LED (green) Power LED (green) Power LED (green) Power LED (green) Power LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) ! The Power, HDD Access, and Message LEDs are visible even if the system front bezel is closed.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2-1 This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. Chapter 2 Hardware setup
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2.1 Chassis cover The chassis features a âÂÂscrewless designâ that allows convenient assembly and disassembly. You can simply push or slide mechanical bolts and locks to remove the cover. 2. Slide the side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 1 1 1 1 1 3. Set the side cover aside. ⢠Make sure that you unplug the power cord before removing the side cover. ⢠Take extra care when removing the side cover. Keep your fingers from components inside the chassis that can cause injury, such as the CPU/chassis fan and other sharp-edged parts. 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 Removing the side cover Removing the side cover Removing the side cover Removing the side cover Removing the side cover 1. Push up the chassis lock on the rear panel to release the side cover.
2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover To reinstall the side cover: 1. Align the cover rail with the chassis rail (A), then match and insert the cover top hooks to the elongated holes on the side of the chassis (B). All the four hooks must properly fit the designated holes. 2. Slide the cover toward the front until it snaps in place. 3. Push down the chassis lock to secure the side cover. You may need to remove some of the installed components to access the DIMM sockets and internal connectors. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10 Removable componentsâ for instructions. Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Without the side cover, the internal structure and installed components of the barebone server vary depending on the model you purchased. Refer to section âÂÂ1.5 Internal featuresâ for the different model configurations. Perform the procedures in the succeeding sections to install the CPU, system memory, disk drives, and expansion cards; replace fans and power supply; and connect the system cables. A A A A A B B B B B 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2.2 Motherboard information The barebone server comes with the K8N-DL motherboard already installed. The motherboard is secured to the chassis by ten (10) screws as indicated by the circles in the illustration below. Refer to âÂÂChapter 4 Motherboard informationâ for detailed information on the motherboard. î K8N-DL Place this Place this Place this Place this Place this side towards side towards side towards side towards side towards the rear of the rear of the rear of the rear of the rear of the chassis the chassis the chassis the chassis the chassis Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing any motherboard component or connection. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and may damage motherboard components.
2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Note in the above illustration that the CPU has a notched corner. This corner indicates the processor Pin 1 that should match a specific corner of the CPU socket. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with dual surface mount 940-pin Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) sockets designed for AMD Opteron⢠64 processors. The 128-bit-wide data paths of these processors can run applications faster than processors with only 32-bit or 64-bit wide data paths. Take note of the notched corner on the CPU. This corner should match a specific corner on the socket to ensure correct installation. Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Before installing the CPU, remove the chassis fan attached to the inner side of the rear panel to allow enough space for the installation. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10 Removable componentsâ for details. Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 If installing only one CPU, use the CPU socket marked CPU1.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that the notched corner matches the socket corner with a triangle mark. 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it fits in place. The CPU fits only in one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the pins and damaging the CPU! 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. 6. Apply the thermal interface material (thermal grease) to the top of the CPU. This thermal grease should come with the CPU package. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to install a second CPU. Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner To install a CPU: 1. Unlock the socket by pressing the lever sideways, then lift it up to a 90ð-100ð angle. Make sure that the socket lever is pushed back all the way; otherwise the CPU does not fit in completely. Socket lever Socket lever Socket lever Socket lever Socket lever Incorrect installation of the CPU into the socket may bend the pins and severely damage the CPU!
2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan The AMD Opteron⢠64 processors require a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Your system comes with two proprietary CPU fan and heatsink assemblies. Do not Do not Do not Do not D o n o t replace these CPU fans with other models. Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink fits properly on the retention module base. Retention Module Base Retention Module Base Retention Module Base Retention Module Base Retention Module Base CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Fan CPU Fan CPU Fan CPU Fan CPU Fan Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket Retention bracket Retention bracket Retention bracket Retention bracket ⢠The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. ⢠You do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. ⢠Make sure that a Thermal Interface Material is properly applied to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. 2. Attach one end of the retention bracket to the retention module base.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors may occur if you fail to plug this connector. 5. Connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_FAN1. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the other heatsink if you have installed a second CPU, then connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_FAN2. The heatsinks appear as shown when installed. 3. Align the other end of the retention bracket (near the retention bracket lock) to the retention module base. 4. Push down the retention bracket lock on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base.
2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with six 184-pin Double Data Rate (DDR) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. The following figure illustrates the location of the sockets: For CPU 1 For CPU 1 For CPU 1 For CPU 1 For CPU 1 Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Channel A DIMM_A3 Channel B DIMM_B3 DIMM_A1 80 Pins 104 Pins K8N-DL 184-pin DDR DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A3 DIMM_B3 K8N-DL î
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations You may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, or 4 GB registered ECC DDR DIMMs into the DIMM sockets using the memory configurations in this section. ⢠For dual-channel configuration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same for better performance. Single CPU: Single CPU: Single CPU: Single CPU: Single CPU: DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2=DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 Dual CPU: Dual CPU: Dual CPU: Dual CPU: Dual CPU: DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2=DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2=DIMM_A3 DIMM_B3 ⢠When using one DDR DIMM module, install into DIMM_A1 slot only. ⢠When using two DDR DIMM modules, install into DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 slots only. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. ⢠Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR400 Qualified Vendors List (QVL).
2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Make sure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. A DDR DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1 DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 3. Unhook the hinge-like tabs from the holes on the right side of the front panel to completely detach the front panel assembly from the chassis. Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Before you can install a 5.25-inch drive, you should first remove the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover). The front panel assembly is attached to the chassis through four hooked tabs hooked tabs hooked tabs hooked tabs hooked tabs o n t h e left side and four hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs o n the right side. To remove the front panel assembly: 2.5 Front panel assembly 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly 2. Pull and swing the left edge of the front panel outward. Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever 1. Pull the lock lever (blue bar) on the front edge of the chassis outward to release the front panel assembly.
2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly To reinstall the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover): 1. Insert the four hinge-like tabs to the holes on the right edge of the chassis. 2. Swing the front panel to the left and fit the four (4) hooked tabs to the left side of the chassis until the tabs snap back in place. Hooked tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Do not use too much force when removing or when reinstalling the front panel assembly.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2.6 5.25-inch drives Three 5.25-inch drive bays are located on the upper front part of the chassis. An optical drive that comes standard with the system package occupies the uppermost bay (labeled 1) . The two lower bays (labeled 2 and 3) are available for additional 5.25-inch devices. If you have previously used and powered up the system, and that it may be connected to an AC power source, make sure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing any system components. Failure to do so may cause damage to the motherboard and other system components! To install a 5.25-inch drive: 1. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the metal cover of the bay where you want to install the drive. 2. From the side of the drive bay, slide the drive bay lock by pushing it to the left to release the drive lock bar. Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive bay lock Drive bay lock Drive bay lock Drive bay lock Drive bay lock 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 3. When released, pull up the drive bay lock bar. Underneath the lock bar are two pegs that match the holes on the drive bay. This mechanism secures the drive to the bay in place of screws. 4. While holding up the drive lock bar, carefully insert a 5.25-inch drive into the bay, until the back of the drive aligns to the rear edge of the drive cage. 5. Connect the IDE cable to the IDE connector on the back of the drive. 6. Connect a 4-pin plug from the power supply to the power connector on the back of the drive. IDE cable IDE cable IDE cable IDE cable IDE cable Power plug Power plug Power plug Power plug Power plug Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Lock pegs Lock pegs Lock pegs Lock pegs Lock pegs Due to space constraints inside the chassis, do not insert the drive all the way at this time. This will allow you enough space to easily connect the drive cables.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 7. Make sure that the drive and bay holes align as shown. When in place, the drive protrudes about an inch from the front panel. 8. Pull down the bar lock and insert the lock pegs to the drive/bay holes, then push the drive lock to the right to secure the drive. 9. On the front panel assembly, detach the plastic bay cover opposite the 5.25-inch drive that you installed by pressing the two hooked tabs on each side of the bay cover. 10. Reinstall the front panel assembly when done. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assemblyâ for instructions.
2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.7 Hard disk drives 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Follow these instructions to install a hot-swap SATA hard disk drive (HDD). 1. Open the front bezel to access the hot-swap drive trays. 2. Release a drive tray by pushing the spring lock to the right, then pulling the tray lever outward. The drive tray ejects slightly after you pull out the lever. 3. Firmly hold the tray lever and pull the drive tray out of the bay. 4. An empty drive tray requires a metal bracket for support. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the bracket when you are ready to install a hard disk in the drive tray. Metal bracket Metal bracket Metal bracket Metal bracket Metal bracket Tray lever Tray lever Tray lever Tray lever Tray lever Spring lock Spring lock Spring lock Spring lock Spring lock
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 5. Place a SATA hard disk to the drive tray and secure it with four screws. 6. Carefully insert drive tray and push it all the way to the depth of the bay until just a small fraction of the tray edge protrudes. 7. Push the tray lever until it clicks and secures the drive tray in place. The drive tray is correctly placed when its front edge aligns with the bay edge.
2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Your package comes with specially designed hard disk drive rails if you want to install the hard disk drives internally (not hot-swap). Depending on which bay you wish to install your hard disk drive, the orientation of the drive rails vary so that the screw holes match those on the drive. For identification purposes, the drive rails are referred to as âÂÂRail 1â and âÂÂRail 2â as shown below. Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk drive cage drive cage drive cage drive cage drive cage To install a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk drive cage: 1. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to section 2.5.1 for instructions. 2. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to attach Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 t o the side of the drive as shown. The rail end should be on the side of the drive connectors. Take note of the correct orientation of the drive rails. There is only one correct correct correct correct correct way to attach the rails when installing drives on the hard disk drive cage. Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole Hole Hole Hole Hole 4 4 4 4 4 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Rail Rail Rail Rail Rail handle handle handle handle handle Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 3. Attach Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 t o the other side of the drive as shown. The rail end should be on the side of the drive connectors. 6. Push the drive all the way to the depth of the bay until the rail locks clicks, indicating that the drive is securely in place. 4. Check the HDD jumper setting. Refer to the label pasted on the HDD for the description of jumper settings. The setting âÂÂCable Selectâ is recommended. 5. Carefully insert the drive into a bay on the front panel. Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors 7. Connect the 15-pin SATA power plug to the power connector at the back of the drive, then connect the other end to a 4-pin plug (female) from the power supply unit.
2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 8. Connect one end of the supplied 7-pin SATA cable to the SATA connector at the back of the drive. 9. Connect the other end to a SATA connector on the motherboard. Refer to Chapter 4 for the location of the SATA connectors.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2. Press the dummy cover into the slot opening until the hook tab clicks in place. 3. When installed, the dummy cover appears as shown. Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover The HDD dummy covers come pre-installed on the front panel bezel. In case you removed the covers, follow these steps to re-install them. To install an HDD dummy cover: 1. From the inside of the front panel assembly, insert the flat end of a dummy cover into the slot as shown. The end with the hook tab should be close to the front panel LEDs. Flat end Flat end Flat end Flat end Flat end Hook tab Hook tab Hook tab Hook tab Hook tab
2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.8 Expansion cards The chassis is designed with a screwless expansion slot frame on the rear panel. This design feature allows you to install or remove an expansion card in less steps. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause physical injury, and damage to the card and motheboard components! 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install a standard size expansion card: 1. Remove the plastic card lock opposite the slot where you wish to install the expansion card. Release the card lock by pressing the center tabs and pushing outward. Set the card lock aside for later use. 2. Remove the metal bracket opposite the slot where you wish to install the expansion card. Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab 3. Push the expansion card connector to the slot, then make sure that it is properly seated on the slot.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2.8.2 2.8.2 2.8.2 2.8.2 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card To remove an expansion card: 1. Remove the plastic card lock that secures the expansion card. 2. Firmly hold the expansion card and pull it out of the slot. 3. Replace the slot metal bracket, then place the plastic card lock back where you removed it. Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab 4. When the card is in place, secure it with the plastic card lock that you removed earlier. Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab
2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 K8N-DL IEEE1394_1 DDR DIMM_A1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) A TX12V1 FP_AUDIO1 A TXPWR1 S ATA 4 SAT A_RAID1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: RJ-45 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In Bottom: Rear Surround L/R Middle: Side surround L/R T op: Center/Subwoofer P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 DDR DIMM_A2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) PCI_E1 PCI_E2 PCI2 PCI1 TSB43AB22A BCM5751 ALC850 26.7cm (10.5in) 30.5cm (12in) S ATA 3 SOCKET 940 CPU2 SOCKET 940 CPU1 SAT A_RAID2 SA T A_RAID3 SA T A_RAID4 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 SEC_IDE1 SATA 1 î SATA 2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 GAME1 PANEL1 1394_EN1 LAN_EN1 SB_PWR1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS KBPWR1 CPU_FAN2 FLOPPY1 FRNT_FAN1 Silicon Image SAT ALink Sil3114CT176 CD1 CPU_FAN1 Super I/O CPU_WARN1 2.9 Cable connections ⢠The bundled system cables are pre-connected before shipment. You do not need to disconnect these cables unless you will remove pre-installed components to install additional devices. ⢠Refer to this section when reconnecting cables to ensure correct cable connections. 2.9.1 2.9.1 2.9.1 2.9.1 2.9.1 Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the motherboard connectors. Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard 8. CPU fan 2 9. Chassis fan 10. Power supply SMBus 11. Front IEEE 1394 cable 12. Front USB cable 13. Front audio cable 14. Serial ATA connectors 1. 8-pin 12V power 2. 24-pin ATX power 3. Secondary IDE (optical drive) 4. Floppy disk drive 5. Chassis intrusion 6. Front panel cable 7. CPU fan 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2.9.2 2.9.2 2.9.2 2.9.2 2.9.2 SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections A SATA backplane comes pre-installed in the TW510-E2 AA4 model. The SATA backplane has four SATA signal and power connectors to support Serial ATA hard disk drives. The backplane design incorporates a hot swap feature to allow easy connection or removal of SATA hard disks. The LED on the backplane connect to the front panel LED to indicate HDD status. See section âÂÂ1.6 LED informationâ for details. Front side Front side Front side Front side Front side The front side of the SATA backplane faces the front panel when installed. This side includes four SATA connectors for the hot swap drive trays. Each SATA connector is labeled (CON1, CON3, CON5, CON7) so you can easily determine their counterpart connectors at the back side of the backplane. Refer to the table for reference. HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD Front side Front side Front side Front side Front side Back side Back side Back side Back side Back side Device Device Device Device Device connector connector connector connector connector connector connector connector connector connector HDD 1 CON1 CON2 HDD 2 CON3 CON4 HDD 3 CON5 CON6 HDD 4 CON7 CON8 Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs CON1 CON1 CON1 CON1 CON1 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON7 CON7 CON7 CON7 CON7
2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 Back side Back side Back side Back side Back side The back side of SATA backplane faces the rear panel when installed. This side includes the power and HDD fan connectors, jumper, SATA interfaces, and SMBus connectors. SMBus connector SMBus connector SMBus connector SMBus connector SMBus connector (upper 6-1 pins) (connects the SMB cable from the motherboard) Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector (for HDD fan) Power connectors Power connectors Power connectors Power connectors Power connectors (connect power plugs from the power supply) CON2 CON2 CON2 CON2 CON2 CON4 CON4 CON4 CON4 CON4 CON6 CON6 CON6 CON6 CON6 CON8 CON8 CON8 CON8 CON8 Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector (lower 6-1 pins) (connects the SMB cable from the power supply, when available) SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments The 6-pin jumper J1 J1 J1 J1 J 1 allows you to define your desired SATA configuration. The picture below shows the location of jumper J1 with pins 1-3 and 2-4 shorted. Refer to the table for the jumper settings and the appropriate ID# for each SATA HDD bay. J1 setting J1 setting J1 setting J1 setting J1 setting (1-3 shorted, 2-4 shorted) Device Device Device Device Device SATA BP ID SATA BP ID SATA BP ID SATA BP ID SATA BP ID Drive Bay 1 CON2 Drive Bay 2 CON4 Drive Bay 3 CON6 Drive Bay 4 CON8
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) The back side SATA connectors are attached to the motherboard SATA connectors controlled by the NVIDIA î CK8-04 chip. Refer to the illustration below for the location of the SATA connectors. Refer to the table below for the default SATA cable connections. Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to ID ID ID ID ID (on motherboard) (on motherboard) (on motherboard) (on motherboard) (on motherboard) CON2 SATA1 CON4 SATA2 CON6 SATA3 CON8 SATA4 K8N-DL IEEE1394_1 DDR DIMM_A1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) ATX12V1 FP_AUDIO1 A TXPWR1 SATA 4 SATA_RAID1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: RJ-45 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Ke yboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out Top:Line In Bottom: Rear Surround L/R Middle: Side surround L/R Top: Center/Subwoofer PARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 DDR DIMM_A2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) PCI_E1 PCI_E2 PCI2 PCI1 TSB43AB22A BCM5751 ALC850 26.7cm (10.5in) 30.5cm (12in) SATA 3 SOCKET 940 CPU2 SOCKET 940 CPU1 SATA_RAID2 SATA_RAID3 SATA_RAID4 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 SEC_IDE1 SATA1 î SATA2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 GAME1 PANEL1 1394_EN1 LAN_EN1 SB_PWR1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS KBPWR1 CPU_FAN2 FLOPPY1 FRNT_FAN1 Silicon Image SAT ALink Sil3114CT176 CD1 CPU_FAN1 Super I/O CPU_WARN1 S ATA 4 S ATA 3 T A_RAID4 SATA 1 SATA 2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS FRNT_FAN1 SATA3 SATA3 SATA3 SATA3 SATA3 SATA4 SATA4 SATA4 SATA4 SATA4 SATA1 SATA1 SATA1 SATA1 SATA1 SATA2 SATA2 SATA2 SATA2 SATA2
2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.10 Removable components You may need to remove previously installed system components when installing or removing system devices, or when you need to replace defective components. This section tells how to remove the following components: 5. Front I/O board 6. Chassis footpads and roller wheels 7. Power supply 1. Chassis fan 2. HDD blowers 3. SATA backplane(s) 4. Floppy disk drive module 2.10.1 2.10.1 2.10.1 2.10.1 2.10.1 Chassis fan Chassis fan Chassis fan Chassis fan Chassis fan To remove the chassis fan: 1. Disconnect the 3-pin fan cable from the connector REAR_FAN1 on the motherboard. 2. Press the tabs on the outer corners of the system fan, then pull the fan out of the chassis. 3. Lift the chassis fan case lock hooks, then push the fan from the center of the case until it is detached. Lock hooks Lock hooks Lock hooks Lock hooks Lock hooks
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 To reinstall the chassis fan: 1. Insert the new fan to the chassis fan cage. 4. Pull the fan out from the fan case, then set aside. 2. Firmly hold the chassis fan on the side with the tabs and position it into its slot, making sure that the four hooks underneath the fan match the corresponding holes on the rear panel.
2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 3. Push the fan into the chassis until the four hooks lock securely into the holes on the rear panel. 4. Re-connect the 3-pin fan cable from the connector REAR_FAN1 on the motherboard. 2.10.2 2.10.2 2.10.2 2.10.2 2.10.2 HDD fan HDD fan HDD fan HDD fan HDD fan To remove the HDD fan: 1. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the HDD fan cage to the chassis. 2. Hold the outer side of the fan cage, then pull sideways to release it from the chassis. 3. Disconnect the 3-pin fan cable from the fan connector on the backplane before completely detaching the fan cage from the chassis. Due to space constraints inside the chassis, some cables may interfere with the removal of the fan cage. To easily remove the fan cage, try to slightly push it inward (toward the motherboard) before pulling it out of the chassis.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2. Re-connect the 3-pin fan cable to the fan connector on the backplane. Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane (FAN1) (FAN1) (FAN1) (FAN1) (FAN1) 5. Press the fan case hooks outwards until the fan detaches from the case. 6. Slightly press the center of the fan vent to flush the fan out from the case. Set the HDD fan aside. 4. Locate four fan hooks inside the HDD fan case. 1. Insert a new HDD fan to the fan case until it clicks in place. To re-install the HDD fan:
2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 4. Push the outer edge of the fan cage sideways to fit it to the drive cage. You hear a click when the fan cage correctly fits in place. Side tabs Side tabs Side tabs Side tabs Side tabs Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage 3. Hold the outer side of the HDD fan cage and hook the two side tabs to the inner edge of the drive cage. Make sure that the system cables are not caught up when you place the HDD fan. 5. Secure the fan cage with the thumb screw.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2.10.3 2.10.3 2.10.3 2.10.3 2.10.3 SATA backplane SATA backplane SATA backplane SATA backplane SATA backplane To remove the SATA backplane: 1. Remove the HDD blower case. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.2 HDD fanâ for instructions. 2. Disconnect all cables from the SATA backplane. When disconnecting a cable, hold and firmly pull the cable plug. DO NOT pull the cable itself. Doing so may damage the cable! 3. From the inner edge, push the backplane outward so that the outer edge protrudes slightly from the slot. 4. From the outer edge, firmly hold the backplane and carefully slide it out.
2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To reinstall a SATA backplane: 1. Position the backplane into its slot with the component side facing the rear panel, and the power connectors on top. 2. Align the backplane with the rail-like dents on the slot to ensure that it fits securely. 3. Slide the backplane into the slot until it fits. If correctly installed, the outer edge of the backplane aligns with the corner of the drive cage. 4. Connect the appropriate cables to the backplane. Refer to sections âÂÂ2.9.2 SATA backplane connectionsâ for details. Rail-like dents Rail-like dents Rail-like dents Rail-like dents Rail-like dents
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36 2.10.4 2.10.4 2.10.4 2.10.4 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive 2. Carefully pull out the drive from the chassis until you see the cables connected to the drive. To remove the floppy disk drive: 1. Remove the screw that secures the drive to the chassis. You need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the floppy disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. 3. Disconnect the floppy disk cable and power cable from the drive to completely release the drive.
2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To install a floppy disk drive: 1. Position the floppy drive vertically with the eject button on the left side (close to the HDDs). 2. Connect the drive signal cable and power cable. 4. Secure the drive cage with a screw. 3. Carefully push the drive into the bay until the drive cage fits the front edge of the bay. Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on the connector the connector the connector the connector the connector Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-38 2-38 2-38 2-38 2-38 2.10.5 2.10.5 2.10.5 2.10.5 2.10.5 Front I/O board Front I/O board Front I/O board Front I/O board Front I/O board You need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the front I/O board. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. To remove the front I/O board: 1. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O board bracket to the front panel. 4. Remove the screw that secures the I/O board to the bracket. 2. Carefully pull out the bracket until you see the cables connected to the I/O board. 3. Disconnect all the cables from the I/O board.
2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To install the front I/O board: 1. Place the I/O board in the bracket, component side up. Secure the front I/O board to the bracket with a screw. 2. Position the I/O board into the bay with the component side to the left (close to the HDDs), then connect the I/O cables to the connectors on the back of the I/O board. Refer to âÂÂ2.9.1 Motherboard connectionsâ for details on cable connections. 3. Insert the I/O board into the bay until the bracket fits the front edge of the bay. 4. Secure the I/O board bracket with a screw.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-40 2.10.6 2.10.6 2.10.6 2.10.6 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels The barebone server system is shipped with four footpads attached to the bottom of the chassis for stability. You need to remove these footpads if: ⢠if you want to replace the footpads with the bundled roller wheels ⢠you wish to install the system to a rack (Refer to âÂÂChapter 3: Installation optionsâ of this user guide, and to the âÂÂRackmount Kitâ user guide for instructions.) To remove the footpads: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a flat screwdriver to flip out the inside layer of a footpad. 3. Remove the footpad by rotating it counterclockwise. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the other three footpads.
2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To remove the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the wheels to the bottom of the chassis. 3. Repeat step 2 to remove the other three roller wheels. Remove the chassis roller wheels if you wish to mount the system to a rack. For convenient transport, install the roller wheels the came with the system package. Each wheel has a brake lock to stabilize the chassis in place. To install the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the chassis in its side. 2. Locate the designated screw holes for each of the four wheel sets. Take note of the numbers alongside each hole when placing screws. 3. Secure each wheel to the bottom of the chassis using four screws. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the other three wheels. 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-42 2.10.7 2.10.7 2.10.7 2.10.7 2.10.7 Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Refer to this section when removing or installing power supply modules to the barebone system. You MUST disconnect all power cable plugs from the motherboard and other installed devices before removing the power supply unit. The picture below shows the motherboard and device connectors where the power plugs are connected. Refer to the Appendix at the end of this document for the power supply specifications. 1. 24-pin ATX (motherboard power connector; hidden behind the drive cage ) 2. 8-pin 12V (motherboard power connector; hidden behind the drive cage ) 3. 2 x 4-pin plugs (SATA backplane) 4. 4-pin plug (floppy disk drive; hidden ) 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 Make sure to unplug ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL power cables from the system devices before removing the power supply module.
2-43 2-43 2-43 2-43 2-43 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To remove the 600 W single power supply module: 1. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the power supply metal plate. Do not remove the thumb screw from the metal plate. Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Thumbscrew 2. Hold the metal plate bar and push it downward to release the plate from the chassis. Remove the metal plate completely. 3. Use one hand to push the power supply module from inside the power supply cage, then carefully pull out the module from the chassis. Metal plate bar Metal plate bar Metal plate bar Metal plate bar Metal plate bar
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-44 2-44 2-44 2-44 2-44 To install a power supply unit: 1. Firmly hold the power supply unit and insert it into the power supply cage. 2. Push the power supply unit all the way in until its outer end aligns with the rear panel. Be careful with the power supply cables when inserting the power supply module into the cage. Due to space constraints, the cables may get entangled with the installed components or other cables, causing the cables to break! 3. Place the metal plate flat on the outer end of the power supply module, flushed to the top of the chassis, while matching the four hooks with their corresponding holes on the rear panel. Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole 4. Hold the metal plate bar and push it upward to lock the hooks to their holes. At the same time, you may also push the top of the metal plate to fit it completely. 5. Secure the metal plate with the thumb screw.
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter describes how to prepare the barebone server for rack mounting. Chapter 3 Installation options
Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 The items required for the optional configurations described in this chapter are not included in the standard barebone system package. These items are purchased separately. Preparing the system for rack mounting Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheelsâ for instructions on removing the footpads or roller wheels. Removing the top cover Removing the top cover Removing the top cover Removing the top cover Removing the top cover To remove the top cover: 1. Remove the side cover. Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side coverâ for instructions. 2. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. 3. Locate the lock tab underneath the top cover and press it outward to release the cover. 4. Slide the top cover toward the front panel, then lift it up from the chassis. Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Refer to the installation guide that came with the Rackmount Rail Kit for instructions on how to attach the rails and on the barebone server system and the corresponding rails on the industrial rack. Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover (bottom view) (bottom view) (bottom view) (bottom view) (bottom view)
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. Chapter 4 Motherboard info
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4.1 Motherboard layout K8N-DL IEEE1394_1 DDR DIMM_A1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) A TX12V1 FP_AUDIO1 A TXPWR1 S ATA 4 SA TA_RAID1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: RJ-45 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In Bottom: Rear Surround L/R Middle: Side surround L/R T op: Center/Subwoofer P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 DDR DIMM_A2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) PCI_E1 PCI_E2 PCI2 PCI1 TSB43AB22A BCM5751 ALC850 26.7cm (10.5in) 30.5cm (12in) S ATA 3 SOCKET 940 CPU2 SOCKET 940 CPU1 SA TA_RAID2 SA TA_RAID3 SAT A_RAID4 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 SEC_IDE1 S ATA1 î S ATA2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 GAME1 P ANEL1 1394_EN1 LAN_EN1 SB_PWR1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS KBPWR1 CPU_FAN2 FLOPPY1 FRNT_FAN1 Silicon Image SA T ALink Sil31 14CT176 CD1 CPU_FAN1 Super I/O CPU_WARN1
4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 4-4 2. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 4-5 3. 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 4-5 4. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) 4-6 5. RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) 4-6 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 4-7 2. Primary IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE, SEC_IDE) 4-7 3. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 4-8 4. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) 4-9 5. CPU, front, and rear fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) 4-10 6. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 4-10 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) 4-11 8. IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) 4-11 9. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 8-pin ATX12V1) 4-12 10. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) 4-13 11. Internal audio connectors (4-pin CD1) 4-13 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) 4-14 13. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) 4-14 14. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 4-15
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4.2 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! K8N-DL î K8N-DL Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 12 23
4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default is the Space Bar). This feature requires an ATX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard TI 1394a IEEE 1394 controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the 1394 feature. K8N-DL î K8N-DL Keyboard power setting KBPWR1 1 2 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 K8N-DL î K8N-DL 1394 function setting 1394_EN Enable (Default) Disable 23 12
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom î BCM5751 Gigabit LAN1 controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN feature. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Silicon Image î 3114R RAID controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the RAID feature. K8N-DL î RAID_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 23 12 K8N-DL RAID controller setting K8N-DL î K8N-DL CPU LAN1_EN setting LAN1_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 3 2 2 1
4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) These connectors are for Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cables. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 4.3 Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. ⢠The Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for UltraDMA 100/66 IDE devices. K8N-DL î NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY1 K8N-DL Floppy disk drive connector K8N-DL IDE connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. SEC_IDE1 PRI_IDE1 PIN 1 K8N-DL î
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) Supported by the NVIDIA î nForce4⢠chipset, these connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives that allows up to 3Gb/s of data transfer rate. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 1 0, or S/W RAID 5 configuration. Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA The actual data transfer rate depends on the speed of Serial ATA hard disks installed. K8N-DL î S ATA 4 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXN4 RSA T A_RXP4 GND S ATA 3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXN3 RSA T A_RXP3 GND K8N-DL SA T A connectors S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXN2 RSA T A_RXP2 GND S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXN1 RSA T A_RXP1 GND
4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) Supported by the Silicon Image î Sil3114 RAID controller, these connectors are for Serial ATA signal cables. These connectors support up to four Serial ATA hard disk drives that can be configured as a disk array through the onboard Silicon Image Sil3114 SATA RAID controller. ⢠Before creating a RAID configuration, make sure that you have connected the Serial ATA cables to these connectors and have installed the Serial ATA hard disks drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Silicon Image RAID utility and Serial ATA BIOS setup during POST. ⢠The RAID 5 driver is not Windows Hardware Quality Labs (WHQL) certified. K8N-DL î K8N-DL SA T A RAID connectors SA T A_RAID1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXN1 RSA T A_RXP1 GND SA T A_RAID2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXN2 RSA T A_RXP2 GND GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXN3 RSA T A_RXP3 GND SA T A_RAID3 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXN4 RSA T A_RXP4 GND SA T A_RAID4
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350mA~ 2000mA ( 24 W max.) or a total of 1A~3.4 8A (41.7 6 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. ⢠Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Lack of sufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors! ⢠The ASUS Smart Q-Fan function is supported using the CPU fans (CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2) connectors. ⢠The chipset fan is synchronized with the CPU fans. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and /or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. K8N-DL î GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN1 REAR_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V FRNT_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN2 FRNT_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V REAR_F AN2 K8N-DL Fan connectors GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN1 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN2 CPU_F AN2 FRNT_F AN1 REAR_F AN2 K8N-DL î K8N-DL SMBus connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_4_CLK# GND I2C_4_DA T A# 5VSB F AN_PWM
4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB cable from the USB/GAME port module to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) This connector is for the IEEE 1394a module. Connect the IEEE 1394 module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable t o the IEEE 1394 connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! K8N-DL î K8N-DL USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 USB910 USB 5V USB_P10- USB_P10 GND NC USB 5V USB_P9- USB_P9 GND 1 K8N-DL î K8N-DL IEEE-1394 connector IE1394_1 1 GND 12V TPB0- GND TP A0- 12V TPB0 GND TP A0
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) These connectors are for an ATX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠Make sure that your power supply unit (PSU) can provide at least the minimum power required by your system. See the table below for details. K8N-DL î K8N-DL A TX Power connectors For Power Supply with 20-pin Power Connector 24-pin Power Connector GND 12V GND 12V GND 12V GND 12V 8-pin 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground
4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the GAME cable from the USB/GAME port module to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM. The function of this connector is disabled in 8-channel mode. K8N-DL î GAME1 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN 5V J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V K8N-DL Game connector K8N-DL î CD1 (Black) Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground K8N-DL Internal audio connector
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports legacy AC âÂÂ97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector. K8N-DL î CHASSIS1 (Default) 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND K8N-DL Chassis intrusion connector K8N-DL î FP_AUDIO1 BLINE_OUT_L MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L BLINE_OUT_R NC MICPWR 5V A AGND K8N-DL Front panel audio connector
4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system ON or puts the system in SLEEP or SOFT-OFF mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. The system panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. K8N-DL î K8N-DL System panel connector P ANEL1 * Requires an A TX power supply . PLED- PWR 5V Speaker PLED GND RESET GND Reset Ground Ground PLED HD_LED- HD_LED HD_LED SPKO PWRSW MLED MLED- MLED
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. Chapter 5 BIOS setup
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS in DOS using a floppy disk or the motherboard support CD.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Star t.ss Windows î 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AwardBIOS Flash utilities.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . d. From the Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D: is your optical drive. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) can be updated using the AwardBIOS Flash Utility. Follow these instructions to update the BIOS using this utility. 1. Download the latest BIOS file from the ASUS web site. Rename the file to K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN and save it to a floppy disk. Save only the updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to avoid loading the wrong BIOS file. 2. Copy the AwardBIOS Flash Utility (awdflash.exe) from the Software folder of the support CD to the floppy disk with the latest BIOS file. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode using the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 4. When the A:> A:> A:> A:> A : > appears, replace the bootable floppy disk with the floppy disk containing the new BIOS file and the Award BIOS Flash Utility. 5. At the prompt, type awdflash awdflash awdflash awdflash awdflash then press <Enter>. The Award BIOS Flash Utility screen appears. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please input File Name! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program:
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 6. Type the BIOS file name in the File Name to File Name to File Name to File Name to File Name to Program Program Program Program Program field, then press <Enter>. 7. Press <N> when the utility prompts you to save the current BIOS file. The following screen appears. 8. The utility verifies the BIOS file in the floppy disk and starts flashing the BIOS file. Do not turn off or reset the system during the flashing process! AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Warning: DonâÂÂt Turn Off Power Or Reset System! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Program Flashing Memory - OFE00 OK Write OK No Update Write Fail Message: Do You Want To Save BIOS (Y/N) 9. The utility displays a Flashing Complete Flashing Complete Flashing Complete Flashing Complete Flashing Complete message indicating that you have successfully flashed the BIOS file. Remove the floppy disk then press <F1> to restart the system. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved F1 Reset For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Flashing Complete Press <F1> to Continue Write OK No Update Write Fail
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 3. Type a filename for the current BIOS file in the Save current BIOS Save current BIOS Save current BIOS Save current BIOS Save current BIOS as as as as a s field, then press <Enter>. 4. The utility saves the current BIOS file to the floppy disk, then returns to the BIOS flashing process. 5.1.3 5.1.3 5.1.3 5.1.3 5.1.3 Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file You can use the AwardBIOS Flash Utility to save the current BIOS file. You can load the current BIOS file when the BIOS file gets corrupted during the flashing process. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Save current BIOS as: AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please Wait! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Checksum: DAD6H Save current BIOS as: old.bin AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please Wait! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Now Backup System BIOS to File! To save the current BIOS file using the AwardBIOS Flash Utility: 1. Follow steps 1 to 6 of the previous section. 2. Press <Y> when the utility prompts you to save the current BIOS file. The following screen appears. Make sure that the floppy disk has enough disk space to save the file.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the CD for the BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... Found CDROM, try to Boot from it... Pass When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device...
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any CD from the optical drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. When no CD is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... Found CDROM, try to Boot from it... Fail Detecting floppy drive A media...
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. Insert Disk then press Enter or ESC to continue POST 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive then press <Enter>. The following screen appears. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please wait... For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 5. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable Low-Pin Count (LPC) chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the LPC chip. The LPC chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ5.7 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Change the internal clock. System Time 15 : 30 : 36 System Date Wed, Feb 2 2005 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Primary IDE Master [None] Primary IDE Slave [None] Secondary IDE Master [None] Secondary IDE Slave [None] Third IDE Master [None] Fourth IDE Master [None] IDE Channel 4 Master [None] IDE Channel 5 Master [None] Base Memory 256K Extended Memory 261120K Total Memory 262144K Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ6.2.7 Pop-up window.â 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar At the bottom of the Setup screen is a legend bar. The keys in the legend bar allow you to navigate through the various setup menus. The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their corresponding functions. Navigation Key Navigation Key Navigation Key Navigation Key Navigation Key Function Function Function Function Function <F1> <F1> <F1> <F1> <F1> Displays the General Help screen <F5> <F5> <F5> <F5> <F5> Loads setup default values <Esc> <Esc> <Esc> <Esc> <Esc> Exits the BIOS setup or returns to the main menu from a sub-menu Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Selects the menu item to the left or right Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Moves the highlight up or down between fields Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Scrolls backward through the values for the highlighted field Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Scrolls forward through the values for the highlighted field <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> Brings up a selection menu for the highlighted field <F10> <F10> <F10> <F10> <F10> Saves changes and exit
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5.2.7 5.2.7 5.2.7 5.2.7 5.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 5.2.8 5.2.8 5.2.8 5.2.8 5.2.8 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Change the internal clock. System Time 15 : 30 : 36 System Date Wed, Feb 2 2005 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Primary IDE Master [None] Primary IDE Slave [None] Secondary IDE Master [None] Secondary IDE Slave [None] Third IDE Master [None] Fourth IDE Master [None] IDE Channel 4 Master [None] IDE Channel 5 Master [None] Base Memory 256K Extended Memory 261120K Total Memory 262144K Legacy Diskette A: Disabled ..... [ ] 360K , 5.25 in. ..... [ ] 1.2M , 5.25 in. ..... [ ] 720K , 3.5 in. ..... [ ] 1.44M, 3.5 in. ..... [ ] 2.88M, 3.5 in. ..... [ ] âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ :Move ENTER:Accept ESC:Abort Pop-up menu Pop-up menu Pop-up menu Pop-up menu Pop-up menu
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 5.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4 Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] This feature allows reading and writing of 1.2 MB (as opposed to 1.44 MB) data on a 3.5-inch floppy disk. This is required to support Japanese standard floppy drives. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Drive A] 5.3.5 5.3.5 5.3.5 5.3.5 5.3.5 Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] The base memory, extended memory, and the total memory values are auto-detected. These fields are not user-configurable. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Change the internal clock. System Time 15 : 30 : 36 System Date Wed, Feb 2 2005 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Primary IDE Master [None] Primary IDE Slave [None] Secondary IDE Master [None] Secondary IDE Slave [None] Third IDE Master [None] Fourth IDE Master [None] IDE Channel 4 Master [None] IDE Channel 5 Master [None] Base Memory xxxK Extended Memory xxxxxxK Total Memory xxxxxxK
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.3.6 5.3.6 5.3.6 5.3.6 5.3.6 Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Capacity, Cylinder, Head, Precomp, Landing Zone, Sector, and Transfer Mode, and S.M.A.R.T Status). These values are not user-configurable. These items show âÂÂ0â or âÂÂNoneâ if no IDE device is installed in the system. PIO Mode PIO Mode PIO Mode PIO Mode PIO Mode Sets the PIO mode for the IDE device. The settings Mode 0 to 4 allow successive increase in performance. Configuration options: [Auto] [Mode 0] [Mode 1] [Mode 2] [Mode 3] [Mode 4] UDMA Mode UDMA Mode UDMA Mode UDMA Mode UDMA Mode When this item is set to [Auto], the UDMA capability allows improved transfer speeds and data integrity for supported IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Select [Auto] to automatically detect an IDE hard disk drive. If automatic detection is successful, the BIOS automatically fills in the correct values for the remaining fields on this sub-menu. If the hard disk was already formatted on a previous system, the BIOS may detect incorrect parameters. Select [Manual] to manually enter the IDE hard disk drive parameters. Refer to the next section âÂÂManually detecting an IDE drive.â If no drive is installed select [None]. Configuration options: [None] [Auto] [Manual] While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Select Menu Item Specific Help Set a PIO mode for the IDE device. Mode0 through 4 successive increase in performance. Primary IDE Master PIO Mode [Auto] UDMA Mode [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Capacity 0 MB Cylinder 0 Head 0 Precomp 0 Landing Zone 0 Sector 0 Transfer Mode None S.M.A.R.T Status None
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Before attempting to configure a hard disk drive, make sure you have the correct configuration information supplied by the drive manufacturer. Incorrect settings may cause the system to fail to recognize the installed hard disk. Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Allows selection of the sector addressing mode. The default [Auto] allows automatic detection of an IDE hard disk drive. Select [CHS] for this item if you set the Primary IDE Master to [Manual] to manually enter the drive information. Configuration options: [CHS] [LBA] [Large] [Auto] Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive To manually enter the drive information, set the Primary IDE Master item to [Manual], and the Access Mode item to [CHS]. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Select Menu Item Specific Help Set a PIO mode for the IDE device. Mode0 through 4 successive increase in performance. Primary IDE Master PIO Mode [Auto] UDMA Mode [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Manual] Access Mode [CHS] Capacity 0 MB Cylinder 0 Head 0 Precomp 0 Landing Zone 0 Sector 0 Transfer Mode None S.M.A.R.T Status None To enter the number of cylinder, head, precomp, landing zone, sector per track for the drive, highlight an item, key-in the value that you obtained from the drive label or documentation, then press <Enter>. To enter a value, you may also highlight the item, then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu. Type in the value indicated in the drive label or documentation, the press <Enter>. Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Displays the auto-detected hard disk capacity. Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Shows the number of the hard disk cylinders.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 Head Head Head Head Head Shows the number of the hard disk read/write heads. Precomp Precomp Precomp Precomp Precomp Displays the precompressed volumes on the hard disk, if any. Landing Zone Landing Zone Landing Zone Landing Zone Landing Zone Displays the driveâÂÂs maximum usable capacity as calculated by the BIOS based on the drive information that you entered. Sector Sector Sector Sector Sector Shows the number of sectors per track. Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Shows the data transfer mode if the hard disk supports this feature. Otherwise, this item is grayed out and shows the value [None]. S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status Shows the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T) status if the hard disk supports this feature. Otherwise, this item is grayed out and show the value [None]. After entering the IDE hard disk drive information, use a disk utility, such as FDISK, to partition and format new IDE hard disk drives. This is necessary so that you can write or read data from the hard disk. Make sure to set the partition of the Primary IDE hard disk drives to âÂÂActive.â 5.3.7 5.3.7 5.3.7 5.3.7 5.3.7 Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave When configuring a drive as Primary IDE Slave, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.8 5.3.8 5.3.8 5.3.8 5.3.8 Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master When configuring a drive as Secondary IDE Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.9 5.3.9 5.3.9 5.3.9 5.3.9 Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave When configuring a drive as Secondary IDE Slave, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions.
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.3.10 5.3.10 5.3.10 5.3.10 5.3.10 Third IDE Master Third IDE Master Third IDE Master Third IDE Master Third IDE Master When configuring a drive as Primary IDE Slave, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions which are not discussed in this section. Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive When set to [Auto], allows automatic selection of the extended IDE drive installed, if any. Set this item to [None] if there is no extended IDE drive, or if you do not wish to detect the drive even if installed. Configuration options: [None] [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Allows selection of the sector addressing mode. Configuration options: [Large] [Auto] 5.3.11 5.3.11 5.3.11 5.3.11 5.3.11 Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master When configuring a drive as Fourth IDE Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ and section âÂÂ6.3.10 Third IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.12 5.3.12 5.3.12 5.3.12 5.3.12 IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master When configuring a drive as IDE Channel 4 Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ and section âÂÂ6.3.10 Third IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.13 5.3.13 5.3.13 5.3.13 5.3.13 IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master When configuring a drive as IDE Channel 5 Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ and section âÂÂ6.3.10 Third IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Select Menu Item Specific Help Set a PIO mode for the IDE device. Mode0 through 4 successive increase in performance. Primary IDE Master Extended IDE Drive [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Capacity 0 MB Cylinder 0 Head 0 Precomp 0 Landing Zone 0 Sector 0 Transfer Mode None S.M.A.R.T Status None
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration 5.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] Disables or enables the CPU L1/L2 cache. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] Disables or enables the CPU L3 cache. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit CPU Configuration Memory Configuration Chipset Onboard Device PCIPnP USB Configuration F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Press Enter to set F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable CPU L1/L2 cache. CPU Configuration CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] CPU Frequency [200.0] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Memory Configuration This menu shows the memory configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] When set to [Auto], BIOS detects the DRAM configurations automatically. Setting to [Manual] allows you to set the DRAM timing configurations from the available options. Configuration options: [Auto] [Manual] The items Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value , CAS# latency CAS# latency CAS# latency CAS# latency CAS# latency , Min RAS# Min RAS# Min RAS# Min RAS# Min RAS# Active Time Active Time Active Time Active Time Active Time , RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay , and Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time become configurable only when the Timing Mode item is set to [Manual]. Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Allows selection of the DRAM frequency. Configuration options: [100Mhz] [133Mhz] [166Mhz] [200Mhz] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] Sets the latency (in clocks) between the DRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [2] [2.5] [3] Select Menu Item Specific Help <Enter> to select DRAM configuration by [Auto] (recommended). [Manual allows you to set each configuration on your own. Memory Configuration Timing Mode [Auto] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200Mhz] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] Master ECC Enabled [Enabled] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] Allows you to select the CPU frequency. Configuration options: [200.0] [201.0] [202.0] ... [400.0] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] Disables or enables the AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Controls the number of DRAM clocks used for DRAM parameters. Configuration options: [5T] [6T] [7T] [8T] [9T] [10T] [11T] [12T] [13T] [14T] [15T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] Controls the latency between the DRAM active command and the read/ write command. Configuration options: [2T] [3T] [4T] [5T] [6T] [7T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DRAM. Configuration options: [2T] [3T] [4T] [5T] [6T] [7T] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Enables or disables memory interleaving. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] Allows memory hoisting/remapping of the memory-mapped I/O address hole to above 4GB system memory. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] Allows selection of [Continuous] for standard mode, or [Discreet] for aggressive mode. Configuration options: [Continuous] [Discreet] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Enables or disables ECC check/correct mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] Allows selection for DIMMs that are ECC-compliant. Configuration options: [At Least One] [All are] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], a machine-check exception (#MC) occurs whenever an machine-check error that may not be corrected is encountered. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], allows ECC checking to be based on a 128/16 data/ECC rather than on a 64/8 data/ECC. You may only enable this feature in 128-bit DRAM data width mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], correctable errors are corrected as the data is passed to the requestor. The data in the DRAM is not corrected if this item is set to [Disabled]. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] Specifies the scrub rate of the next address to be scrubbed by the DRAM scrubber. Configuration options: [Disabled] [40.0ns] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] Specifies the scrub rate of the next address to be scrubbed by the L2 cache scrubber. Configuration options: [Disabled] [40.0ns] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] Specifies the scrub rate of the next address to be scrubbed by the data cache scrubber. Configuration options: [Disabled] [40.0ns] 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset This menu shows the chipset configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip IDE channel 0. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip IDE channel 1. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable OnChip IDE Channel0. Chipset OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Width [ â â â â â 16 â â â â â 16] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] Init Display First [PCI Slot] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Allows selection of hyper transport frequency. Configuration options: [1x] [2x] [3x] [4x] [5x] Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ â â â â â 16 16 16 16 16 â â â â â 16] 16] 16] 16] 16] Allows selection of hyper transport frequency. Configuration options: [ âÂÂ8 â 8][âÂÂ16 âÂÂ8] [ âÂÂ8 âÂÂ16] [ â 16 â 16] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] Enables or disables the cache function of the system BIOS. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Enables or disables the CPU spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] Enables or disables SATA spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] Enables or disables PCIE spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] Enables or disables the SSE instructions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Allows you to select the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [PCI Slot] [PCIEx] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] Enables or disables the switch to support IDE DMA transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip SATA1 (ports 1 and 2). Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device This menu shows the onboard device configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options, or a sub-menu with additional items. Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable Speech IC controller. Onboard Device Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Disabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] NVRAID Configuration Super I/O Device SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] Enables or disables the switch to support SATA DMA transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip SATA2 (ports 3 and 4). Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] Enables or disables the switch to support SATA2 DMA transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] Enables or disables the IDE Prefetch mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Enables or disables the speech IC controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Enables or disables the speech IC IDE error report. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Enables or disables the speech IC system error report. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard Silicon Image SATALink device. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard 1394 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard AC97 audio controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration This sub-menu contains RAID-related function items. Select the items that you wish to enable to create a RAID set. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable NVIDIA RAID feature. NVRAID Configuration RAID Enable [Disabled] IDE Primary Master RAID [Disabled] IDE Primary Slave RAID [Disabled] IDE Secondary Master RAID [Disabled] IDE Secondary Slave RAID [Disabled] First SATA Master RAID [Disabled] Second SATA Master RAID [Disabled] Third SATA Master RAID [Disabled] Fourth SATA Master RAID [Disabled] RAID Enable [Disabled] Enables or disables the NVIDIA RAID feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Super I/O Device Super I/O Device Super I/O Device Super I/O Device Super I/O Device This sub-menu contains RAID-related function items. Select the items that you wish to enable to create a RAID set. Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the serial port 1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] [Auto] Onboard Parallel Port [378/IRQ7] Allows you to select the parallel port base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378/IRQ7] [278/IRQ5] [3BC/IRQ7] Parallel Port Mode [SPP] Allows you to select the parallel port mode. Configuration options: [SPP] [EPP] [ECP] [ECP EPP] [Normal] IDE Primary Master/Slave, IDE Secondary Master/Slave RAID [Disabled] When enabled, allows you to use the device/s for creating a RAID set. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] First/Second/Third/Fourth SATA Master RAID [Disabled] When enabled, allows you to use the device/s for creating a RAID set. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Set base I/O address for serial port 1. Super I/O Device Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Onboard Parallel Port [378/IRQ7] Parallel Port Mode [SPP] EPP Mode Select EPP1.7 ECP Mode Use DMA 3 Game Port Address [201] Midi Port Address [330] Midi Port IRQ [10]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 EPP Mode Select [EPP1.7] Allows you to select the version of EPP mode. This item becomes configurable only if the Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode i s set to [ECP] or [ECP EPP]. Configuration options: [EPP1.9] [EPP1.7] ECP Mode Use DMA [3] Allows you to configure the parallel port DMA channel for the selected ECP mode. This item becomes configurable only if the Parallel Port Parallel Port Parallel Port Parallel Port Parallel Port Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode i s set to [ECP] or [ECP EPP]. Configuration options: [1] [3] Game Port Address [201] Allows you to select the game port address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [201] [209] Midi Port Address [330] Allows you to select the MIDI port address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [330] [300] [290] Midi Port IRQ [10] Allows you to select the MIDI port IRQ. Configuration options: [5] [10]
5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced 5.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.5 PCIPnP PCIPnP PCIPnP PCIPnP PCIPnP This menu shows the PCIPnP configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Select Menu Item Specific Help BIOS can automatically configure all the boot and Plug and Play compatible devices. If you choose Auto, you cannot select IRQ DMA and memory base address fields, since BIOS automatically assigns them. PCIPnP Resources Controlled By [Auto] IRQ Resources PCI/VGA Pallete Snoop [Disabled] ** PCI Express relative items ** Maximum Payload Size [4096] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Allows automatic or manual assignments of IRQ resources to boot devices and Plug and Play devices. Configuration options: [Auto] [Manual] When the item Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By i s set to [Auto], the item IRQ Resources is grayed out and not user-configurable. Refer to the section âÂÂIRQ Resourcesâ for information on how to enable this item. PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] Some non-standard VGA cards, like graphics accelerators or MPEG video cards, may not show colors properly. Setting this field to [Enabled] corrects this problem. If you are using a standard VGA card, leave this field to the default setting [Disabled]. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Sets the maximum TLP payload size (in bytes) for PCI Express devices. Configuration options: [128] [256] [512] [1024] [2048] [4096]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources Select Menu Item Specific Help BIOS can automatically configure all the boot and Plug and Play compatible devices. If you choose Auto, you cannot select IRQ DMA and memory base address PCIPnP Resources Controlled By [Manual] IRQ Resources PCI/VGA Pallete Snoop [Disabled] ** PCI Express relative items ** Maximum Payload Size [4096] Set the item Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By t o [Manual] to enable the item IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources and assign the interrupts depending on the type of installed PCI devices. IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Legacy ISA for devices compliant with the original PC AT bus specification, PCI/ISA PnP for devices compliant with the Plug and Play standard whether designed for PCI or ISA bus architecture. IRQ Resources IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-12 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device]
5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.4.6 5.4.6 5.4.6 5.4.6 5.4.6 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration This menu shows the USB configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Setting this item to [Enabled] allows the built-in high speed USB support in the BIOS to turn on automatically when you install high speed USB devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable support for the legacy USB devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Enable/Disable USB 2.0 and legay controller. USB Configuration USB Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit 5.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ACPI feature on the operating system. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1(POS)] [S3(STR)] [S1&S3] Select Menu Item Specific Help Enable/Disable ACPI support for Operating System. ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor
5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration This menu shows the Advanced Powed Management (APM) configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Select Menu Item Specific Help This field allows you to set the automatic power saving features. APM Configuration Power Management [User Define] HDD Power Down [Disabled] Video Off Method [PDMS Support] Soft-Off by PBTN [Instant-Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] USB Wake-Up From S1/S3 [Disabled] Power-On By Alarm [Disabled] Day of Month Alarm 0 Time (hh:mm:ss) 0 : 0 : 0 Power On Function [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Allows you to set the automatic power saving features. Configuration options: [User Define] [Min Saving] [Max Saving] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] Shuts down any hard disk drives in the system after a period of inactivity as set in this field. Configuration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min]... [15 Min] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Allows you to select the video off method. The Display Power Management System (DPMS) feature allows the BIOS to control the video display card if it supports DPMS. [Blank Screen] only blanks the screen. Use this for monitors without power management or âÂÂgreenâ features. Configuration options: [Blank Screen] [V/H Sync Blank] [DPMS Support] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] When set to [Instant-Off], the system goes to soft-off when you press the power button for less than 4 seconds. When set to [Delay 4 Sec], the system power goes off when you press the power button for more than 4 seconds. Configuration options: [Delay 4 Sec] [Instant-Off] Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to [Power Off], the system goes into âÂÂoff stateâ after an AC power interruption. When set to [Power On], the system turns on automatically after a power interruption. When set to [Last State], the system goes into whatever was the system state (on or off) before the power interruption. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PME to generate a wake-up event. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable wake-up on ring. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable wake-up from S1/S3 by USB keyboard or mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake-up event. When this item is enabled, the items Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm and Time Time Time Time Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm items become user-configurable with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] To set the date of alarm, highlight this item and press <Enter> to display the Day of Month Alarm pop-up menu. Key-in a value within the specified range then press <Enter>. Configuration options: [Min=0] [Max=31] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] To set the time of alarm: 1. Highlight this item and press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu for the hour field. 2. Key-in a value (Min=0, Max=23), then press <Enter>. 3. Press <TAB> to move to the minutes field then press <Enter>. 4. Key-in a minute value (Min=0, Max=59), then press <Enter>. 5. Press <TAB> to move to the seconds field then press <Enter>. 6. Key-in a value (Min=0, Max=59), then press <Enter>.
5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Allows you to define specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Ctrl ESC] [Space Bar] [Power Key] [Any Key] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor This menu shows the hardware monitoring status. Select an item, then press Enter to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Select Menu Item Specific Help Press enter to view. Hardware Monitor Voltage Monitor Smart Q-Fan Configuration System Temperature 39 o C/102 o F CPU1 Temperature 39 o C/102 o F CPU2 Temperature 29 o C/84 o F CPU Fan1 speed 2925 RPM CPU Fan2 speed 2925 RPM Front Fan1 speed 0 RPM Front Fan2 speed 0 RPM Rear Fan1 speed 0 RPM Rear Fan2 speed 0 RPM Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage These fields show the auto-detected voltages through the onboard voltage regulators. CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage Allow you to adjust the DDR voltage. Configuration options: [2.60V] [2.70V] [2.80V] [2.90V] Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Allow you to adjust the chipset voltage. Configuration options: [1.50V] [1.60V] [1.70V] [1.80V] CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control Allow you to select the CPU voltages. Configuration options: [Default VID or plus 100mV] [Default VID] Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Allow you to adjust the chipset voltage. Configuration options: [1.20V] [1.25V] [1.30V] [1.35V] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Voltage Monitor CPU VCORE A (V) 1.53 V CPU VCORE B (V) N/A 3.3 Voltage 3.28 V 12V Voltage 11.91 V 1.5V Voltage 1.56 V 2.5V Voltage 2.54 V 5VCC Voltage 4.99 V 5VSB Voltage 4.96 V VBAT Voltage 3.10 V CPU1 DDR Voltage [2.60V] CPU2 DDR Voltage [2.60V] Chipset Voltage [1.50V] CPU1 Voltage Control [Default VID 100mV] CPU2 Voltage Control [Default VID 100mV] Hyper Transport Voltage [1.20V] Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Press enter to select enable/disable Smart Fan. Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Fan Control [Disabled] System Target Temperature 50 CPU1 Target Temperature 55 CPU1 Target Temperature 55 Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Smart Fan feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ⢠The System/CPU1/CPU2 Target Temperature items become configurable only when you set Smart Fan Control to [Enabled]. ⢠When the actual system/CPU1/CPU2 temperature becomes equal to the target temperature set in the following fields, the respective fan will run at full speed. System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] Allows you to set the target temperature for the system. Configuration options: [Min=20] [Max=50] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] Allows you to set the target temperature for CPU1. Configuration options: [Min=30] [Max=60] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] Allows you to set the target temperature for CPU1. Configuration options: [Min=30] [Max=60]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit 5.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot settings. Select an item then press Enter to display a sub-menu with additional items, or show a pop-up menu with the configuration options. 5.6.1 5.6.1 5.6.1 5.6.1 5.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] These items allow you to select your boot device priority. Configuration options: [Removable] [Hard Disk] [CDROM] [Legacy LAN] [Disabled] Select Menu Item Specific Help Select Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Removable Device Priority Boot Settings Configuration Security F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Select your boot device priority Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [Removable] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk]
5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.6.2 5.6.2 5.6.2 5.6.2 5.6.2 Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Select Menu Item Specific Help Use <up> or <down> arrow to select a device, the press < > to move it up, or <-> to move it down the list. Press <ESC> to exit this menu. Removable Device Priority 1. Floppy Disks F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Use <up> or <down> arrow to select a device, the press < > to move it up, or <-> to move it down the list. Press <ESC> to exit this menu. Hard Disk Boot Priority 1. Bootable Add-in Cards
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-41 5-41 5-41 5-41 5-41 F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.6.4 5.6.4 5.6.4 5.6.4 5.6.4 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Select Menu Item Specific Help Select your boot device priority. Boot Settings Configuration Boot Other Device [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) 6 Typematic Delay (Msec) 250 Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable selection of other boot device. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] This field speeds up the Power-On-Self Test (POST) routine by skipping certain tests while booting, thereby decreasing the boot time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Sets the system to halt on errors according to the system functions specified in each option. Configuration options: [All Errors] [No Errors] [All, But Keyboard] [All , But Diskette] [All, But Disk/Key] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] When enabled, the BIOS will seek the floppy disk drive to determine whether the drive has 40 or 80 tracks. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [On] [Off]
5-42 5-42 5-42 5-42 5-42 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup The items Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) and Typematic Delay Typematic Delay Typematic Delay Typematic Delay Typematic Delay become configurable only when the item Typematic Setting is enabled. Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Allows you to select the rate at which character repeats when you hold a key. Configuration options: [6] [8] [10] [12] [15] [20] [24] [30] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Allows you to set the delay before key strokes begin to repeat. Configuration options: [250] [500] [750] [1000] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the keyboard typematic rate setting. Set to [Enabled] to configure the Type Rate and Type Delay items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-43 5-43 5-43 5-43 5-43 F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.6.5 5.6.5 5.6.5 5.6.5 5.6.5 Security Security Security Security Security Select Menu Item Specific Help Select your boot device priority. Security Supervisor Password Clear User Password Clear Password Check [Setup] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] These fields allow you to set passwords: To set a password: 1. Select an item then press <Enter>. 2. Type in a password using a combination of a maximum of eight (8) alpha-numeric characters, then press <Enter>. 3. When prompted, confirm the password by typing the exact characters again, then press <Enter>. The password field setting is changed to Set Set Set Set Set . To clear the password: 1. Select the password field and press <Enter> twice. The following message appears: 2. Press any key to continue. The password field setting is changed to Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear . PASSWORD DISABLED !!! Press any key to continue...
5-44 5-44 5-44 5-44 5-44 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup A note about passwords A note about passwords A note about passwords A note about passwords A note about passwords The Supervisor password is required to enter the BIOS Setup program preventing unauthorized access. The User password is required to boot the system preventing unauthorized use. Forgot your password? Forgot your password? Forgot your password? Forgot your password? Forgot your password? If you forget your password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. The RAM data containing the password information is powered by the onboard button cell battery. If you need to erase the CMOS RAM, refer to section âÂÂ4.2 Jumpersâ for instructions. Password Check Password Check Password Check Password Check Password Check This field requires you to enter the password before entering the BIOS setup or the system. Select [Setup] to require the password before entering the BIOS Setup. Select [System] to require the password before entering the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [System]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-45 5-45 5-45 5-45 5-45 F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the BIOS setup default settings, save or discard any changes you made, or exit the Setup utility. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F10>, to save your changes to CMOS before exiting the Setup utility. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to save and exit ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option then press <Enter> if you wish to exit the Setup utility without saving your changes. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to discard your changes and exit ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F5>, to load the optimized values for each of the Setup menu items. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to load the default values ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu Select Menu Item Specific Help This option save data to CMOS and exits the setup menu. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Discard Changes
5-46 5-46 5-46 5-46 5-46 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Select this option to discard the changes that you made, and restore the previously saved values. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to discard any changes, and load the previously saved values ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter provides information on how to create a RAID set and how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone server supports. Chapter 6 Driver installation
6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID configurations The system motherboard comes with the NVIDIA CK-04 RAID controller that allows you to configure Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ6.2 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. Refer to the RAID controllers user manual on the support CD for detailed information on RAID configurations. 6.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.2 RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility You can create a RAID set using the utility embedded in each RAID controller. For example, you can use the NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA î î î î î RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility i f y o u installed SATA hard disk drives on the SATA connectors supported by the NVIDIA CK-04 Southbridge. Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to enter the RAID configuration utility.
6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1.3 6.1.3 6.1.3 6.1.3 6.1.3 NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA î î î î î RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations The motherboard includes a high performance SATA RAID controller integrated in the NVIDIA î CK-04 chip. The RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 1 0, and JBOD using four independent Serial ATA channels. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to the Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced menu, select Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device , then press <Enter>. 3. Select the NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration option, then press <Enter>. 4. Select the RAID Enabled RAID Enabled RAID Enabled RAID Enabled RAID Enabled item, then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 5. Select [Enabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] from the options, then press <Enter>. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. ⢠For detailed information on the NVIDIA î RAID configuration, refer to the âÂÂNVIDIA î RAID UserâÂÂs Manualâ in the system or motherboard support CD. ⢠The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen. Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA î î î î î RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility To enter the NVIDIA î RAID Utility: 1. Restart the computer. 2. During POST, press <F10> to display the utility main menu. [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Define a New Array - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Block: Optimal Free Disks Array Disks Loc Disk Model Name Loc Disk Model Name 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Add 2.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Del
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-5 At the bottom section of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select menu options. Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) To create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array menu, select RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode , then press <Enter>. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select Striping Striping Striping Striping Striping , then press <Enter>. Mirroring Striping Stripe Mirroring Spanning [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup The navigation keys vary depending on the menu level or option. 3. Press <TAB> to move to the Striping Block Striping Block Striping Block Striping Block Striping Block option, then press <Enter>. 4. Use the up or down arrow keys to select the stripe block size appropriate to your drive usage, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 8KB to 128KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. You must choose the stripe size value based on the projected drive usage. For low disk usage, select 8 KB/16 KB. For typical disk usage, select 64 KB. Select 128KB for performance disk usage. 8K â â â â â 16K 32K 64K 128K Optim â â â â â TIP. TIP. TIP. TIP. TIP. For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance.
6-6 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-6 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. Press <TAB> to move to the Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks section. 6. Highlight the hard disk drives that you want to add in the RAID set, then press the right arrow key to select. The selected hard disk drives appear in the Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks section. Repeat the process until all desired hard disk drives are added. Clear disk data? [Y] YES [N] Cancel [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Define a New Array - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Block: Optimal Free Disks Array Disks Loc Disk Model Name Loc Disk Model Name 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Add 2.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Del 7. After selecting the hard disk drives, press <F7> to create the RAID 0 set. A pop-up window appears. 8. Press <Y> to delete all data from the hard disk drives, or <N> to continue creating the RAID set without deleting the data on the disks. You will lose all data on the drives if you clear the disk data! 9. The utility displays the created RAID 0 set. Press <Ctrl X> to save your settings and exit the utility. [Ctrl-X]Exit [ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ ]Select [B]Set Boot [N]New Array [ENTER]Detail NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array menu, select RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode , then press <Enter>. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring , then press <Enter>. Mirroring Striping Stripe Mirroring Spanning 5. Press <TAB> to move to the Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks section. 6. Highlight the hard disk drives that you want to add in the RAID set, then press the right arrow key to select. The selected hard disk drives appear in the Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks section. Repeat the process until all desired hard disk drives are added. Clear disk data? [Y] YES [N] Cancel 7. After selecting the hard disk drives, press <F7> to create the RAID 1 set. A pop-up window appears. 8. Press <Y> to delete all data from the hard disk drives and continue creating the RAID set. Press <N> to backup exisitng data to a target hard disk drive. You will lose all data on the drives if you clear the disk data! 9. The utility displays the created RAID 1 set. Press <Ctrl X> to save your settings and exit the utility.0 [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Define a New Array - RAID Mode: Mirroring Striping Block: Optimal Free Disks Array Disks Loc Disk Model Name Loc Disk Model Name 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Add 2.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Del
6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set To rebuild a RAID set: 1. From the Array List Array List Array List Array List Array List , use the up or down arrow keys to select the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>. The RAID set details appear. 2. Press <R>. 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <F7>. A confirmation message appears. 4. Press <Enter> to start rebuilding the array, or <Esc> to cancel. The Array List Array List Array List Array List A r r a y L i s t screen displays the RAID set after rebuilding. Rebuild array? [Enter] OK [Esc] Cancel [Ctrl-X]Exit [ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ ]Select [B]Set Boot [N]New Array [ENTER]Detail NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG No 3 Healthy NVIDIA MIRRORING XXX.XXG [ âÂÂâ ] Select [F6] Back [F7] Finish Array 1 : NVIDIA MIRROR XXX.XXG - Array Detail - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Width: 1 Striping Block: 64K Adapt Channel M/S Index Disk Model Name Capacity 2 1 Master 0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 1 0 Master 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-9 Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array To delete a RAID array: 1. From the Array List Array List Array List Array List Array List , use the up or down arrow keys to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Enter>. The RAID set details appear. [R] Rebuild [D] Delete [C] Clear Disk [ENTER] Return Array 1 : NVIDIA MIRROR XXX.XXG - Array Detail - RAID Mode: Mirroring Striping Width: 1 Striping Block: 64K Adapt Channel M/S Index Disk Model Name Capacity 2 1 Master 0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 1 0 Master 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 2. When the array details appear, press <D> to delete the RAID set. A confirmation message appears. 3. Press <Y> to delete the array, or press <N> to cancel. 4. The Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array menu appears when you press <Y>. Create a new RAID set following the instructions in the previous sections.. [R] Rebuild [D] Delete [C] Clear Disk [ENTER] Return NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG No 3 Healthy NVIDIA MIRRORING XXX.XXG Delete this array? [Y] Yes [N] Cancel You will lose all data on the drives if you delete a disk array!
6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 2. When the array details appear, select the hard disk drive you want to clear, then press <C>. A confirmation message appears. Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data You will lose all data when you clear a disk! To clear the disk data: 1. From the Array List Array List Array List Array List Array List , use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID set, then press <Enter>. The RAID set details appear. [Ctrl-X]Exit [ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ ]Select [B]Set Boot [N]New Array [ENTER]Detail NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG No 3 Healthy NVIDIA MIRRORING XXX.XXG [R] Rebuild [D] Delete [C] Clear Disk [ENTER] Return Array 1 : NVIDIA MIRROR XXX.XXG - Array Detail - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Width: 1 Striping Block: 64K Adapt Channel M/S Index Disk Model Name Capacity 2 1 Master 0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 1 0 Master 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 3. Press <Y> to clear the disk data, or press <N> to cancel.Press <C> to clear disk. The following confirmation message appears. Clear disk data? [Y] Yes [N] Cancel
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD) or in Windows î environment. To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the first boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. When prompted, press any key to boot from the support CD. The Makedisk menu appears. 5. Place a blank, high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 1) FreeDOS command prompt 2) Run AWDFlash to Flash BIOS 3 ) Create Silicon Image SATA SoftRAID 5 miniport for Windows driver 4 ) Create nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver for Win2000 32 bit driver 5 ) Create nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver for WinX P 32 bit driver 6 ) Create nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver for Win2003 32 bit driver Please choose 1 ~ 6 6. Type the number before the option you like to select, then press <Enter>. For example, if you want to create an nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver disk for a 32-bit Windows 2000 system, press <4>, then press <Enter>. 7. The RAID drivers are copied to the floppy disk. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. When you insert a floppy disk with data, the utility erases all the data before copying the RAID drivers.
6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation To create a RAID driver disk in Windows î environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, click NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver Disk Driver Disk Driver Disk Driver Disk Driver Disk t o create an nVIDIA nForce RAID driver disk. To install the RAID driver: 1. Install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. During installation, the computer prompts you to press the F6 F6 F6 F6 F 6 key if you are installing a third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6>, then insert the RAID driver disk to the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow screen instructions to install the RAID drivers.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-13 6.3 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller drivers on a Windows î 2000/XP OS. To install the LAN controller drivers: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Windows î automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found New Hardware Found New Hardware Found New Hardware Found New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel t o close this window. ⢠If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet option to begin installation. 4. Click Next Next Next Next Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation.
6-14 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-14 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.4 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 6.4.1 6.4.1 6.4.1 6.4.1 6.4.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers D r i v e r s menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-15 6.4.2 6.4.2 6.4.2 6.4.2 6.4.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. The screen display and driver options vary under dif ferent operating system versions. NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional Installs the driver for the NVIDIA CK8-04 chip. Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Installs the Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet driver. See page 6-13 for details. Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Installs the driver for the Silicon Image SATA RAID controller. Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Installs the Broadcom NetXtreme software application. Refer to the application help file for details. NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver Creates a driver disk for the NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID controller. Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Installs the drivers and utility for the onboard audio controller. See page 6-18 for details. Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Installs the Silicon Image SATA RAID utility. Refer to the application help file for details.
6-16 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-16 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.4.3 6.4.3 6.4.3 6.4.3 6.4.3 Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software The Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software menu shows the available server management software applications. Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Installs the ASUS Network Utility. Refer to the application help file for details. 6.4.4 6.4.4 6.4.4 6.4.4 6.4.4 Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities The Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities menu shows the available software applications for your barebone server. Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX The Microsoft DirectX î is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-17 ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 The Adobe Acrobat î Reader V5.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 The anti-virus utility scans, identifies, and removes computer viruses. View the online help for detailed information. Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor The Voice Editor application allows you to record and customize wave files for the ASUS POST Reporter⢠utility. Use this program to change the default vocal POST messages. See page 6-27 for details. ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your idle screen by installing the ASUS screen saver.
6-18 6-18 6-18 6-18 6-18 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.5 Software information 6.5.1 6.5.1 6.5.1 6.5.1 6.5.1 Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel The Realtek î ALC850 AC âÂÂ97 audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software provides Jack-Sensing function (Line-In, Line-Out, Mic-In), S/PDIF out support and interrupt capability. The ALC850 also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for three ports (Line-In, Line-Out and Mic-In), eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 from the support CD that came with the system package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will find the SoundEffect icon on the taskbar. From the taskbar, double-click on the SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel . Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon The Jack-sensing and UAJ î technology features are supported on the Line-In, Line-Out, and Mic jacks only.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 Sound Effect options Sound Effect options Sound Effect options Sound Effect options Sound Effect options The Realtek î ALC850 Audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer, set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. To set the sound effect options: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect button. 2. Click the shortcut buttons to change the acoustic environment, adjust the equalizer, or set the karaoke to your desired settings. 3 . The audio settings take effect immediately after you click on the buttons. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
6-20 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-20 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation S/PDIF options S/PDIF options S/PDIF options S/PDIF options S/PDIF options The Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) options allows you to change your S/PDIF output settings. To set the S/PDIF options: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF button. 2. Click the option buttons to change your S/PDIF out settings. 3. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-21 Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration This option allows you to set your speaker configuration. To set the speaker configuration: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration button. 2. Select from the combo list box your current speaker setup, then click Auto Test Auto Test Auto Test Auto Test Auto Test t o test your settings. 3. Click the UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic button to enable or disable the Universal Audio Jack(UAJ î ) technology feature. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
6-22 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-22 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. When finished, the utility prompts the Realtek î EZ-connection dialog box showing your current audio connections. The text at the bottom of the box explains your audio connection status. An X mark denotes an incorrect connection. AI Audio feature AI Audio feature AI Audio feature AI Audio feature AI Audio feature The AI Audio feature works through the connector sensing option that allows you to check if your audio devices are connected properly. To start the connector sensing: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the Connector Sensing Connector Sensing Connector Sensing Connector Sensing Connector Sensing button. 2. Click the Bracket Bracket Bracket Bracket Bracket button to display connected audio devices. 3. Click the Option Option Option Option Option button to change sensing options. 4. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button to start connection sensing. A progress bar displays current connector sensing status. Make sure to exit all audio applications before starting this function.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-23 6-23 6-23 6-23 6-23 HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo This option shows a demo of the Head-Related Transfer Functions (HRTF). To start the HRTF demo: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo button. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path or EAX settings. 3. Click the Play Play Play Play Play button to start or the Stop Stop Stop Stop S t o p button to stop. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit. 6. If there are detected problems, make sure that your audio cables are connected to the proper audio jack and repeat connector sensing. 7. Click the X X X X X button to exit EZ-connection dialog box. 8. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit audio control panel.
6-24 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-24 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation The functions of the Line Out (lime), Line In (blue), Mic (pink), Center/ Subwoofer (Yellow Orange), Rear Speaker Out (Black), and Side Speaker Out (Gray) ports on the rear panel change when you select the 4-channel, 6-channel or 8-channel audio configuration as shown in the following table. Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Yellow Orange - - Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black - Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Gray - - - Side Speaker Out Headset Headset Headset Headset Headset / 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel General settings General settings General settings General settings General settings This option shows the audio settings and allows you to change the language setting or toggle the SoundEffect icon display on the Windows taskbar. To display the general settings: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the General General General General General button. 2. Click the option button to enable or disable the icon display on the Windows taskbar. 3. Click the Language Language Language Language Language combo list box to change language display. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6.5.2 6.5.2 6.5.2 6.5.2 6.5.2 ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠This motherboard includes the Winbond speech controller to support a special feature called the ASUS POST Reporterâ¢. This feature lets you hear vocal messages during POST that alerts you of system events and boot status. In case of a boot failure, you will hear the specific cause of the problem. These POST messages are customizable using the Winbond Voice Editor software that came with your package. You can record your own messages to replace the default messages. Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Following is a list of the default POST messages and the corresponding actions you can take: POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action No CPU installed ⢠Install a supported processor to the CPU socket. See section âÂÂ2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU)â for details. System failed CPU test ⢠Check the CPU if properly installed. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the ASUS contact information on the inside front cover of this user guide. System failed memory test ⢠Install supported DDR DIMMs into the memory sockets. ⢠Check if the DIMMs on the DIMM sockets are properly installed. ⢠Make sure that your DIMMs are not defective. ⢠Refer to section âÂÂ2.4 System memoryâ for instructions on installing a DIMM. System failed VGA test ⢠Install a PCI graphics card into one of the PCI slots, or a PCI Express VGA card into the PCI Express x16 slot. ⢠Make sure that your graphics card is not defective. System failed due to CPU ⢠Check your CPU overclocking settings in the BIOS setup and restore the default CPU parameters. No keyboard detected ⢠Check if your keyboard is properly connected to the purple PS/2 connector on the rear panel. ⢠See section âÂÂ2.7.1 Rear panel connectorsâ for the location of the connector. No IDE hard disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected an IDE hard disk drive to one of the IDE connectors on the motherboard.
6-26 6-26 6-26 6-26 6-26 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action CPU temperature too high ⢠Check if the CPU fan is working properly. CPU fan failed ⢠Check the CPU fan and make sure it turns on after you apply power to the system. ⢠Make sure that your CPU fan supports the fan speed detection function. CPU voltage out of range ⢠Check your power supply and make sure it is not defective. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âÂÂASUS contact informationâ on the inside front cover of this user guide. Computer now booting from operating ⢠No action required system You can enable or disable the ASUS POST Reporter⢠in the Speech IC Speech IC Speech IC Speech IC Speech IC Reporter Reporter Reporter Reporter Reporter item in the BIOS setup. See section 5.4.4 for details.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-27 6.5.3 6.5.3 6.5.3 6.5.3 6.5.3 Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor The Winbond Voice Editor software allows you to customize the vocal POST messages. You can install this application from the support CD. Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor You can launch the program from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor . The Winbond Voice Editor screen appears. Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files To play the default wave files, simply click on a POST event on the left side of the screen, then click the Play button. Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events To avoid conflicts, do not run the Winbond Voice Editor while running the ASUS PC Probe application. The default language setting is English.
6-28 6-28 6-28 6-28 6-28 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 3. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button from the Voice Editor main window to update the EEPROM. 4. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes t o confirm. Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language To change the default language: 1. Click the Load Load Load Load Load button from the Voice Editor main window. A window with the available languages appears. 2. Select your desired language, then click Open Open Open Open Open . The event messages for the language you selected appear on the Voice Editor main window. Not all events on some languages have a corresponding message due to file size constraints. The next time you boot your computer, the ASUS Post Reporter announces the messages in the selected language.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-29 Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages The Voice Editor application allows you to record your own POST messages if your language is not supported or if you wish to to replace the pre-installed wave files. To customize your POST messages. 1. Launch the Voice Editor application and note the list of POST events on the leftmost column of the screen. 2. Prepare your message for each event. 3. Use a recording software (e.g. Windows î Recorder) to record your messages, then save the messages as wave files (.WAV). 4. From the Voice Editor screen, click the Add Add Add Add Add button to display the Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File window. 5. Copy the wave files that you recorded to the database, then close the window when done. ⢠The total compressed size for all the wave files must not exceed 1Mbit, so keep your messages as short as possible. ⢠To keep file sizes small, save your files at a low quality. For example, use 8-bit, mono quality at 22Khz sampling rate. ⢠Create a separate folder for your wave files so you can locate them easily.
6-30 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-30 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation If you receive an error message telling you that the files exceed the total allowable size, do any or all of the following: ⢠Shorten your messages. ⢠Save the wave files at a lower quality ⢠Do not include seldom-used events like FDD Detection, IDE HDD Detection, etc. 6. Select a POST event on the Voice Editor main window, then click the Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit button. The Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor window appears. 7. Locate and select your wave file for the event, then click on the arrow opposite Voice1. The file you select appears on the space next to it. 8. Click OK OK OK OK O K to return to the Voice Editor main window. 9. Do steps 6 to 8 for the other events. 10. When done, click Save Save Save Save S a v e. A window appears prompting you to save your configuration. 11. Type a file name with an .flh .flh .flh .flh .flh extension, then click Save. 12. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button to compress the file and copy into the EEPROM. 13. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes o n the confirmation window that appears.
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This appendix contains the power supply specifications and provides a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server. Appendix Reference information
Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A.1 600 W single power supply A.1.1 A.1.1 A.1.1 A.1.1 A.1.1 General description General description General description General description General description The 600 W SSI-type single power supply with universal AC input includes PFC and ATX-compliant output cables and connectors. The power supply has nine plugs labeled P1 to P11 (no P3). Take note of the devices to which you should connect the plugs. P9 P9 P9 P9 P9 P11 P11 P11 P11 P11 P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P10 P10 P10 P10 P10 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P P P P P 2 2 2 2 2 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P9 P9 P9 P9 P 9 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the second SCSI/SATA backplane P10 P10 P10 P10 P 1 0 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the second SCSI/SATA backplane P2 P2 P2 P2 P 2 Motherboard 8-pin 12V AUX power connector P1 P1 P1 P1 P 1 Motherboard 24-pin ATX power connector P5 P5 P5 P5 P 5 Peripheral device (optical drive) P6 P6 P6 P6 P 6 Peripheral device (available) P7 P7 P7 P7 P 7 Auxiliary power connector; connect this to the first SCSI/SATA backplane P4 P4 P4 P4 P 4 Floppy disk drive P11 P11 P11 P11 P 1 1 Power SMBus connector
A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 A.1.2 A.1.2 A.1.2 A.1.2 A.1.2 Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Max (A) Max (A) Max (A) Max (A) Max (A) 3.33V 24 5V 24 12V 43 -12V 0.5 -5V 0.5 5VSB 2.0 Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Normal Range 110 to 127 V ~ 10 A Auto Range 200 to 240 V ~ 5 A Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range 5 0 H z t o 6 0 H z
Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A.2 Simple fixes The power LED on the The power LED on the The power LED on the The power LED on the The power LED on the server or on the monitor server or on the monitor server or on the monitor server or on the monitor server or on the monitor do not light up do not light up do not light up do not light up do not light up 1. Check if the power cable is properly connected to the power connector in the system rear panel. 2. Make sure that the power cables are connected to a grounded power outlet. 3. Press the power button to make sure that the system is turned on. The keyboard does not The keyboard does not The keyboard does not The keyboard does not The keyboard does not work work work work work Check if the keyboard cable is properly connected to the PS/2 keyboard port. The mouse does not work The mouse does not work The mouse does not work The mouse does not work The mouse does not work Check if the mouse cable is properly connected to the mouse port. The system does not The system does not The system does not The system does not The system does not perform power-on self perform power-on self perform power-on self perform power-on self perform power-on self tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was turned on turned on turned on turned on turned on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed the DIMMs the system supports. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. Problem Problem Problem Problem Problem Action Action Action Action Action Some problems that you may encounter are not due to defects on the system or the components. These problems only requires simple troubleshooting actions that you can perform by yourself.
A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 Problem Problem Problem Problem Problem Action Action Action Action Action The system continuously The system continuously The system continuously The system continuously The system continuously beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned on on on on on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed supported DIMMs. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ appears appears appears appears appears 1. Check if a bootable HDD is active. 2. Check if the HDDs are properly installed. Network connection not Network connection not Network connection not Network connection not Network connection not available available available available available 1. Make sure that the network cable is connected to the LAN port on the rear panel. 2. Make sure that you have installed the LAN drivers from the support CD.
Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information A-6 A-6 A-6 A-6 A-6
ii ii ii ii ii Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. Copyright é 2005 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). ASUS provides this manual âÂÂas isâ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, officers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product. Specifications and information contained in this manual ae furnished for informational use only, and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it. Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair, modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe. E1976 E1976 E1976 E1976 E1976 First edition V1 First edition V1 First edition V1 First edition V1 First edition V1 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005 May 2005
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Notices ............................................................................................... vii Safety information ............................................................................ viii About this guide ................................................................................. ix Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 System package contents .................................................... 1-2 1.2 System specifications .......................................................... 1-3 1.2 System specifications .......................................................... 1-4 1.3 Front panel features ............................................................. 1-5 1.4 Rear panel features .............................................................. 1-6 1.5 Internal features ................................................................... 1-7 1.6 LED information .................................................................... 1-8 Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2.1 Chassis cover ....................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Removing the side cover ........................................ 2-2 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover ...................................... 2-3 2.2 Motherboard information ...................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-5 2.3.1 Overview ................................................................. 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-5 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan ................................ 2-7 2.4 System memory ................................................................... 2-9 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................. 2-9 2.4.2 Memory Configurations ......................................... 2-10 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-11 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-11 2.5 Front panel assembly ......................................................... 2-12 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly ..................... 2-12 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly ................... 2-13 2.6 5.25-inch drives ................................................................. 2-14 2.7 Hard disk drives .................................................................. 2-17 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD ........................... 2-17 2.7.2 Installing an internal SATA HDD ........................... 2-19 2.8 Expansion cards .................................................................. 2-23 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-23 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card ................................ 2-24
iv iv iv iv iv Contents 2.9 Cable connections .............................................................. 2-25 2.9.1 Motherboard connections ..................................... 2-25 2.9.2 SATA backplane connections ............................... 2-26 2.10 Removable components ..................................................... 2-29 2.10.1 Chassis fan ........................................................... 2-29 2.10.2 HDD fan ................................................................ 2-31 2.10.3 SATA backplane ................................................... 2-34 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive ................................................... 2-36 2.10.5 Front I/O board .................................................... 2-38 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels ...................... 2-40 2.10.7 Power suppy unit .................................................. 2-42 Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Chapter 3: Installation options Installation options Installation options Installation options Installation options Preparing the system for rack mounting .............................. 3-2 Removing the footpads or roller wheels ............................... 3-2 Removing the top cover ....................................................... 3-2 Attaching the rack rails ........................................................ 3-2 Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Chapter 4: Motherboard info Motherboard info Motherboard info Motherboard info Motherboard info 4.1 Motherboard layout .............................................................. 4-2 4.2 Jumpers ................................................................................ 4-4 4.3 Internal connectors .............................................................. 4-7 Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: Chapter 5: BIOS information BIOS information BIOS information BIOS information BIOS information 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 5-2 5.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 5-2 5.1.2 Updating the BIOS .................................................. 5-3 5.1.3 Saving the current BIOS file .................................... 5-5 5.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 5-6 5.1.5 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 5-8 5.1.6 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 5-9 5.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 5-12 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 5-13 5.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 5-13 5.2.3 Legend bar ........................................................... 5-14 5.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 5-14 5.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 5-14
v v v v v Contents 5.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 5-14 5.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 5-15 5.2.8 General help .......................................................... 5-15 5.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 5-16 5.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 5-16 5.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 5-16 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 5-16 5.3.4 Floppy 3 Mode Support ........................................ 5-16 5.3.5 Base/Extended/Total Memory .............................. 5-16 5.3.6 Primary IDE Master ............................................... 5-17 5.3.7 Primary IDE Slave .................................................. 5-19 5.3.8 Secondary IDE Master ........................................... 5-19 5.3.9 Secondary IDE Slave ............................................. 5-19 5.3.10 Third IDE Master ................................................... 5-20 5.3.11 Fourth IDE Master ................................................. 5-20 5.3.12 IDE Channel 4 Master ............................................ 5-20 5.3.13 IDE Channel 5 Master ............................................ 5-20 5.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 5-21 5.4.1 CPU Configuration ................................................. 5-21 5.4.2 Memory Configuration .......................................... 5-22 5.4.3 Chipset ................................................................. 5-24 5.4.4 Onboard Device .................................................... 5-26 5.4.5 PCIPnP ................................................................... 5-30 5.4.6 USB Configuration ................................................. 5-32 5.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 5-33 Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Chapter 6: Driver installation Driver installation Driver installation Driver installation Driver installation 6.1 RAID configurations .............................................................. 6-2 6.1.1 Installing hard disks ................................................ 6-3 6.1.2 RAID configuration utility ........................................ 6-3 6.1.3 NVIDIA î RAID configurations .................................. 6-4 6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 6-11 6.3 LAN driver installation ........................................................ 6-13 6.4 Support CD information ...................................................... 6-14 6.4.1 Running the support CD ....................................... 6-14 6.4.2 Drivers menu ........................................................ 6-15
vi vi vi vi vi Contents 6.4.3 Management Software .......................................... 6-16 6.4.4 Utilities ................................................................. 6-16 6.5 Software information ......................................................... 6-18 6.5.1 Realtek Audio Control Panel ................................. 6-18 6.5.2 ASUS POST Reporter⢠.......................................... 6-25 6.5.3 Winbond Voice Editor ........................................... 6-27 Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Appendix: Reference information Reference information Reference information Reference information Reference information A.1 600 W single power supply .................................................. A-2 A.1.1 General description ................................................. A-2 A.1.2 Specifications ......................................................... A-3 A.2 Simple fixes .......................................................................... A-4
vii vii vii vii vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! WARNING! The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
viii viii viii viii viii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged. ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your dealer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Any mechanical operation on this server must be conducted by certified or experienced engineers. ⢠Before operating the server, carefully read all the manuals included with the server package. ⢠Before using the server, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If any damage is detected, contact your dealer as soon as possible. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Place the server on a stable surface. Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Lithium-Ion Battery Warning CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturerâÂÂs instructions. CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Heavy System Heavy System Heavy System Heavy System Heavy System CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! This server system is heavy. Ask for assistance when moving or carrying the system. S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning S/PDIF Safety Warning CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the userâÂÂs safety. Use the power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.
ix ix ix ix ix About this guide Audience Audience Audience Audience Audience This user guide is intended for system integrators and experienced users with at least basic knowledge of configuring a server. Contents Contents Contents Contents Contents This guide contains the following parts: 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction Chapter 1: Product Introduction This chapter describes the general features of the barebone server, including sections on the front panel and rear panel specifications. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options This chapter describes how to prepare the barebone server for rack mounting. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information Chapter 4: Motherboard information This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information Chapter 5: BIOS information This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation This chapter provides information on how to create a RAID set and how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone server supports. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information This appendix contains the power supply specifications and provides a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server.
x x x x x Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details. WARNING: WARNING: WARNING: WARNING: WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and information to aid in completing a task. Conventions Conventions Conventions Conventions Conventions To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.
1-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter describes the general features of the barebone server, including sections on the front panel and rear panel specifications. Chapter 1 Product introduction
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1.1 System package contents Check your system package for the following items. Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis ASUS AK25 5U rackmount chassis Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS K8N-DL motherboard Components Components Components Components Components 600 W single power supply SATA backplane board Front I/O board 52x CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive Floppy disk drive Chassis fan HDD fan CPU fan and heatsink assembly (x 2) Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables A C power cable SATA signal cable SATA power cable SMBus cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Hot-swap HDD trays (including HDD screws) Internal HDD rails (4 pairs) Chassis roller wheels (4 sets) System screws and cables Dummy covers System keys (2 pcs.) Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs TW510-E2 support CD with ASWM* Computer Associates î eTrust ⢠anti-virus CD Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation ASUS TW510-E2 user guide ASUS ASWM 2.0 user guide Optional items Optional items Optional items Optional items Optional items ASUS AK25 rackmount rail kit *ASUS System Web-based Management If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1.2 System specifications The ASUS TW510-E2 is a barebone server system featuring the ASUS K8N-DL motherboard. The server supports dual AMD Opteron⢠processors in 940-pin sockets, and includes the latest technologies through the chipsets embedded on the motherboard. Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis System System System System System dimension dimension dimension dimension dimension Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Storage and Storage and Storage and Storage and Storage and RAID RAID RAID RAID RAID LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 IEEE 1394 USB USB USB USB USB Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion slots slots slots slots slots Drive bays Drive bays Drive bays Drive bays Drive bays Pedestal or rackmount 5U with removable front door bezel and chassis foot stand or roller-wheels. 431 mm (H) x 220 mm (W) x 510 mm (D) ASUS K8N-DL (ATX compatible form factor: 12 in x 10.5 in) Dual Socket 940 for AMD Opteron⢠64 processors Supports AMD 64 architecture that enables simultaneous 32-bit and 64-bit computing NVIDIA î CK8-04 Professional Dual-channel memory architecture 6 x 184-pin DIMM sockets support registered ECC 400/333/266 MHz DDR memory modules Supports up to 24 GB system memory (tested only up to 12 GB on this motherboard due to 4 GB DDR availability) NVIDIA î CK8-04 Professional chipset supports: - 2 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 - 4 x SATA-II 3Gb/s drives - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, JBOD configurations BROADCOM î BMC5751 Gigabit PCI-E LAN controller Realtek î ALC850 8-channel CODEC Supports Universal Audio Jack (UAJ î ) Technology Supports Audio Sensing and Enumeration Technology 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 1 x Optical S/PDIF Out port TI 1394a controller supports one IEEE 1394 port 4 x USB 2.0 ports (on the rear panel) 1 x PCI Express x16 slot 1 x PCI Express x1 slot 2 x PCI slots 1 x 3.25-inch FDD bay 3 x 5.25-inch drive bays (continued on the next page)
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1.2 System specifications Front panel Front panel Front panel Front panel Front panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Management Management Management Management Management Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware monitors monitors monitors monitors monitors Supported OS Supported OS Supported OS Supported OS Supported OS Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply 4 x USB ports 1 x IEEE 1394 port 1 x Headphone port (Line Out) 1 x Microphone port (Line In) 1 x Parallel port 1 x Serial port (COM1) 1 x IEEE 1394 port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical S/PDIF out port 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 8-channel audio ports ASUS Server Web-based Management (ASWM) 2.0 Voltage, temperature, CPU and memory utilization, and fan speed monitoring Automatic Server Restart (ASR) feature Windows î 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4) Windows î XP Professional (Service Pack 2) 600 W power supply (with 24-pin and 8-pin power plugs) Refer to âÂÂChapter 4 Motherboard informationâ for details on the internal connectors.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1-5 1.3 Front panel features The TW510-E2 chassis displays a stylish front bezel with lock. The bezel covers the system components on the front panel and serves as security. Open the bezel to access the front panel components. The drive bays, power and reset buttons, LED indicators, optical drive, floppy drive, USB 2.0 ports, audio I/O ports, and an IEEE 1394 port are located on the front panel. For future installation of 5.25-inch devices, two drive bays are available. C C C C C D-ROM drive D-ROM drive D-ROM drive D-ROM drive D-ROM drive Security Security Security Security Security lock lock lock lock lock Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays Hot-swap HDD bays USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports To access front I/O ports and floppy disk drive without opening the bezel, hold the tab and move the sliding panel (rightmost panel) to the left as shown. Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Empty 5.25-inch bays Power button Power button Power button Power button Power button Reset button Reset button Reset button Reset button Reset button Message LED Message LED Message LED Message LED Message LED HDD access LED HDD access LED HDD access LED HDD access LED HDD access LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Floppy drive Floppy drive Floppy drive Floppy drive Floppy drive IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port MIC (Line In) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port Headphone (Line Out) port
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1-6 1.4 Rear panel features The rear panel includes a slot for the motherboard rear I/O ports, expansion slots, a chassis lock and intrusion switch, a vent for the system fan, and power supply module. Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port PS/2 mouse port USB ports USB ports USB ports USB ports USB ports PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port PS/2 keyboard port Parallel port Parallel port Parallel port Parallel port Parallel port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port IEEE 1394 port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port LAN port Serial port Serial port Serial port Serial port Serial port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Rear Speaker Out port Line In port Line In port Line In port Line In port Line In port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Coaxial S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Optical S/PDIF Out port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Center/Subwoofer port Microphone port Microphone port Microphone port Microphone port Microphone port Line Out port Line Out port Line Out port Line Out port Line Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Side Speaker Out port Po Po Po Po Po wer connector wer connector wer connector wer connector wer connector Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Chassis cover lock Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Power supply module Power supply module Power supply module Power supply module Power supply module 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan 12 cm system fan Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Chassis intrusion switch Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports Rear panel I/O ports (Refer to the description below.)
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-7 1.5 Internal features The barebone server system includes the basic components as shown. 1. Power supply cage 2. Chassis fan 3. K8N-DL motherboard 4. Chassis intrusion switch 5. Expansion card locks 6. Optical drive 7. 2 x 5.25-inch drive bays 8. Hard disk drive cage 9. Front I/O board 10. HDD fan (inside) 11. SATA backplane (hidden) 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11
Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1-8 1.6 LED information The barebone server system comes with five LED indicators. Refer to the following table for the LED status description. LED LED LED LED LED Icon Icon Icon Icon Icon Display status Display status Display status Display status Display status Description Description Description Description Description System System System System System Power LED ON System power ON Blinking System is in suspend mode HDD Access LED OFF No activity Blinking Read/write data into the HDD Message LED OFF System is normal; no incoming event Blinking ASMS indicates a HW monitor event HDD bays HDD bays HDD bays HDD bays HDD bays Drive Status LED Green Bridge board connected to backplane Installed HDD is in good condition Red HDD failure Drive Activity LED Blinking Read/write data into the HDD ! Power LED (green) Power LED (green) Power LED (green) Power LED (green) Power LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) HDD Access LED (green) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Message LED (red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Status LED (green/red) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) Drive Activity LED (green) ! The Power, HDD Access, and Message LEDs are visible even if the system front bezel is closed.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2-1 This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. Chapter 2 Hardware setup
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2.1 Chassis cover The chassis features a âÂÂscrewless designâ that allows convenient assembly and disassembly. You can simply push or slide mechanical bolts and locks to remove the cover. 2. Slide the side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 1 1 1 1 1 3. Set the side cover aside. ⢠Make sure that you unplug the power cord before removing the side cover. ⢠Take extra care when removing the side cover. Keep your fingers from components inside the chassis that can cause injury, such as the CPU/chassis fan and other sharp-edged parts. 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 2.1.1 Removing the side cover Removing the side cover Removing the side cover Removing the side cover Removing the side cover 1. Push up the chassis lock on the rear panel to release the side cover.
2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.1.2 2.1.2 Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover Reinstalling the side cover To reinstall the side cover: 1. Align the cover rail with the chassis rail (A), then match and insert the cover top hooks to the elongated holes on the side of the chassis (B). All the four hooks must properly fit the designated holes. 2. Slide the cover toward the front until it snaps in place. 3. Push down the chassis lock to secure the side cover. You may need to remove some of the installed components to access the DIMM sockets and internal connectors. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10 Removable componentsâ for instructions. Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Viewing the internal structure Without the side cover, the internal structure and installed components of the barebone server vary depending on the model you purchased. Refer to section âÂÂ1.5 Internal featuresâ for the different model configurations. Perform the procedures in the succeeding sections to install the CPU, system memory, disk drives, and expansion cards; replace fans and power supply; and connect the system cables. A A A A A B B B B B 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2.2 Motherboard information The barebone server comes with the K8N-DL motherboard already installed. The motherboard is secured to the chassis by ten (10) screws as indicated by the circles in the illustration below. Refer to âÂÂChapter 4 Motherboard informationâ for detailed information on the motherboard. î K8N-DL Place this Place this Place this Place this Place this side towards side towards side towards side towards side towards the rear of the rear of the rear of the rear of the rear of the chassis the chassis the chassis the chassis the chassis Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing any motherboard component or connection. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and may damage motherboard components.
2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Note in the above illustration that the CPU has a notched corner. This corner indicates the processor Pin 1 that should match a specific corner of the CPU socket. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with dual surface mount 940-pin Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) sockets designed for AMD Opteron⢠64 processors. The 128-bit-wide data paths of these processors can run applications faster than processors with only 32-bit or 64-bit wide data paths. Take note of the notched corner on the CPU. This corner should match a specific corner on the socket to ensure correct installation. Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Before installing the CPU, remove the chassis fan attached to the inner side of the rear panel to allow enough space for the installation. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10 Removable componentsâ for details. Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU2 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 Socket for CPU1 If installing only one CPU, use the CPU socket marked CPU1.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that the notched corner matches the socket corner with a triangle mark. 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it fits in place. The CPU fits only in one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the pins and damaging the CPU! 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. 6. Apply the thermal interface material (thermal grease) to the top of the CPU. This thermal grease should come with the CPU package. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to install a second CPU. Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner Notched corner To install a CPU: 1. Unlock the socket by pressing the lever sideways, then lift it up to a 90ð-100ð angle. Make sure that the socket lever is pushed back all the way; otherwise the CPU does not fit in completely. Socket lever Socket lever Socket lever Socket lever Socket lever Incorrect installation of the CPU into the socket may bend the pins and severely damage the CPU!
2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan The AMD Opteron⢠64 processors require a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Your system comes with two proprietary CPU fan and heatsink assemblies. Do not Do not Do not Do not D o n o t replace these CPU fans with other models. Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink fits properly on the retention module base. Retention Module Base Retention Module Base Retention Module Base Retention Module Base Retention Module Base CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Heatsink CPU Fan CPU Fan CPU Fan CPU Fan CPU Fan Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket lock Retention bracket Retention bracket Retention bracket Retention bracket Retention bracket ⢠The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. ⢠You do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. ⢠Make sure that a Thermal Interface Material is properly applied to the CPU heatsink or CPU before you install the heatsink and fan assembly. 2. Attach one end of the retention bracket to the retention module base.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors may occur if you fail to plug this connector. 5. Connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_FAN1. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the other heatsink if you have installed a second CPU, then connect the fan cable to the 4-pin connector labeled CPU_FAN2. The heatsinks appear as shown when installed. 3. Align the other end of the retention bracket (near the retention bracket lock) to the retention module base. 4. Push down the retention bracket lock on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base.
2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with six 184-pin Double Data Rate (DDR) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. The following figure illustrates the location of the sockets: For CPU 1 For CPU 1 For CPU 1 For CPU 1 For CPU 1 Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 For CPU 2 Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Channel A DIMM_A3 Channel B DIMM_B3 DIMM_A1 80 Pins 104 Pins K8N-DL 184-pin DDR DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_A3 DIMM_B3 K8N-DL î
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations You may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2 GB, or 4 GB registered ECC DDR DIMMs into the DIMM sockets using the memory configurations in this section. ⢠For dual-channel configuration, the total size of memory module(s) installed per channel must be the same for better performance. Single CPU: Single CPU: Single CPU: Single CPU: Single CPU: DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2=DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 Dual CPU: Dual CPU: Dual CPU: Dual CPU: Dual CPU: DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2=DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2=DIMM_A3 DIMM_B3 ⢠When using one DDR DIMM module, install into DIMM_A1 slot only. ⢠When using two DDR DIMM modules, install into DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 slots only. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. ⢠Visit the ASUS website for the latest DDR400 Qualified Vendors List (QVL).
2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Locked retaining clip Make sure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. A DDR DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1 DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 3. Unhook the hinge-like tabs from the holes on the right side of the front panel to completely detach the front panel assembly from the chassis. Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Before you can install a 5.25-inch drive, you should first remove the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover). The front panel assembly is attached to the chassis through four hooked tabs hooked tabs hooked tabs hooked tabs hooked tabs o n t h e left side and four hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs hinge-like tabs o n the right side. To remove the front panel assembly: 2.5 Front panel assembly 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly Removing the front panel assembly 2. Pull and swing the left edge of the front panel outward. Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever Lock lever 1. Pull the lock lever (blue bar) on the front edge of the chassis outward to release the front panel assembly.
2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly Reinstalling the front panel assembly To reinstall the front panel assembly (front bezel and front panel cover): 1. Insert the four hinge-like tabs to the holes on the right edge of the chassis. 2. Swing the front panel to the left and fit the four (4) hooked tabs to the left side of the chassis until the tabs snap back in place. Hooked tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Hinge-like tab Do not use too much force when removing or when reinstalling the front panel assembly.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2.6 5.25-inch drives Three 5.25-inch drive bays are located on the upper front part of the chassis. An optical drive that comes standard with the system package occupies the uppermost bay (labeled 1) . The two lower bays (labeled 2 and 3) are available for additional 5.25-inch devices. If you have previously used and powered up the system, and that it may be connected to an AC power source, make sure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing any system components. Failure to do so may cause damage to the motherboard and other system components! To install a 5.25-inch drive: 1. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the metal cover of the bay where you want to install the drive. 2. From the side of the drive bay, slide the drive bay lock by pushing it to the left to release the drive lock bar. Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive lock bar Drive bay lock Drive bay lock Drive bay lock Drive bay lock Drive bay lock 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 3. When released, pull up the drive bay lock bar. Underneath the lock bar are two pegs that match the holes on the drive bay. This mechanism secures the drive to the bay in place of screws. 4. While holding up the drive lock bar, carefully insert a 5.25-inch drive into the bay, until the back of the drive aligns to the rear edge of the drive cage. 5. Connect the IDE cable to the IDE connector on the back of the drive. 6. Connect a 4-pin plug from the power supply to the power connector on the back of the drive. IDE cable IDE cable IDE cable IDE cable IDE cable Power plug Power plug Power plug Power plug Power plug Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Drive bay holes Lock pegs Lock pegs Lock pegs Lock pegs Lock pegs Due to space constraints inside the chassis, do not insert the drive all the way at this time. This will allow you enough space to easily connect the drive cables.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 7. Make sure that the drive and bay holes align as shown. When in place, the drive protrudes about an inch from the front panel. 8. Pull down the bar lock and insert the lock pegs to the drive/bay holes, then push the drive lock to the right to secure the drive. 9. On the front panel assembly, detach the plastic bay cover opposite the 5.25-inch drive that you installed by pressing the two hooked tabs on each side of the bay cover. 10. Reinstall the front panel assembly when done. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.2 Reinstalling the front panel assemblyâ for instructions.
2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.7 Hard disk drives 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Installing a hot-swap SATA HDD Follow these instructions to install a hot-swap SATA hard disk drive (HDD). 1. Open the front bezel to access the hot-swap drive trays. 2. Release a drive tray by pushing the spring lock to the right, then pulling the tray lever outward. The drive tray ejects slightly after you pull out the lever. 3. Firmly hold the tray lever and pull the drive tray out of the bay. 4. An empty drive tray requires a metal bracket for support. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to remove the bracket when you are ready to install a hard disk in the drive tray. Metal bracket Metal bracket Metal bracket Metal bracket Metal bracket Tray lever Tray lever Tray lever Tray lever Tray lever Spring lock Spring lock Spring lock Spring lock Spring lock
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 5. Place a SATA hard disk to the drive tray and secure it with four screws. 6. Carefully insert drive tray and push it all the way to the depth of the bay until just a small fraction of the tray edge protrudes. 7. Push the tray lever until it clicks and secures the drive tray in place. The drive tray is correctly placed when its front edge aligns with the bay edge.
2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Installing an internal SATA HDD Your package comes with specially designed hard disk drive rails if you want to install the hard disk drives internally (not hot-swap). Depending on which bay you wish to install your hard disk drive, the orientation of the drive rails vary so that the screw holes match those on the drive. For identification purposes, the drive rails are referred to as âÂÂRail 1â and âÂÂRail 2â as shown below. Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk Installing a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk drive cage drive cage drive cage drive cage drive cage To install a SATA hard disk drive to the first hard disk drive cage: 1. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to section 2.5.1 for instructions. 2. Use a Phillips (cross) screwdriver to attach Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 t o the side of the drive as shown. The rail end should be on the side of the drive connectors. Take note of the correct orientation of the drive rails. There is only one correct correct correct correct correct way to attach the rails when installing drives on the hard disk drive cage. Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 1 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 2 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole Hole Hole Hole Hole 4 4 4 4 4 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Rail Rail Rail Rail Rail handle handle handle handle handle Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 3. Attach Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 Rail 2 t o the other side of the drive as shown. The rail end should be on the side of the drive connectors. 6. Push the drive all the way to the depth of the bay until the rail locks clicks, indicating that the drive is securely in place. 4. Check the HDD jumper setting. Refer to the label pasted on the HDD for the description of jumper settings. The setting âÂÂCable Selectâ is recommended. 5. Carefully insert the drive into a bay on the front panel. Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 1 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Hole 3 Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Rail handle Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors Drive connectors 7. Connect the 15-pin SATA power plug to the power connector at the back of the drive, then connect the other end to a 4-pin plug (female) from the power supply unit.
2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 8. Connect one end of the supplied 7-pin SATA cable to the SATA connector at the back of the drive. 9. Connect the other end to a SATA connector on the motherboard. Refer to Chapter 4 for the location of the SATA connectors.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2. Press the dummy cover into the slot opening until the hook tab clicks in place. 3. When installed, the dummy cover appears as shown. Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover Installing an HDD dummy cover The HDD dummy covers come pre-installed on the front panel bezel. In case you removed the covers, follow these steps to re-install them. To install an HDD dummy cover: 1. From the inside of the front panel assembly, insert the flat end of a dummy cover into the slot as shown. The end with the hook tab should be close to the front panel LEDs. Flat end Flat end Flat end Flat end Flat end Hook tab Hook tab Hook tab Hook tab Hook tab
2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.8 Expansion cards The chassis is designed with a screwless expansion slot frame on the rear panel. This design feature allows you to install or remove an expansion card in less steps. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause physical injury, and damage to the card and motheboard components! 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 2.8.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install a standard size expansion card: 1. Remove the plastic card lock opposite the slot where you wish to install the expansion card. Release the card lock by pressing the center tabs and pushing outward. Set the card lock aside for later use. 2. Remove the metal bracket opposite the slot where you wish to install the expansion card. Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab 3. Push the expansion card connector to the slot, then make sure that it is properly seated on the slot.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2.8.2 2.8.2 2.8.2 2.8.2 2.8.2 Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card Removing an expansion card To remove an expansion card: 1. Remove the plastic card lock that secures the expansion card. 2. Firmly hold the expansion card and pull it out of the slot. 3. Replace the slot metal bracket, then place the plastic card lock back where you removed it. Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab 4. When the card is in place, secure it with the plastic card lock that you removed earlier. Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab Card lock tab
2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 K8N-DL IEEE1394_1 DDR DIMM_A1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) A TX12V1 FP_AUDIO1 A TXPWR1 S ATA 4 SAT A_RAID1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: RJ-45 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In Bottom: Rear Surround L/R Middle: Side surround L/R T op: Center/Subwoofer P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 DDR DIMM_A2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) PCI_E1 PCI_E2 PCI2 PCI1 TSB43AB22A BCM5751 ALC850 26.7cm (10.5in) 30.5cm (12in) S ATA 3 SOCKET 940 CPU2 SOCKET 940 CPU1 SAT A_RAID2 SA T A_RAID3 SA T A_RAID4 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 SEC_IDE1 SATA 1 î SATA 2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 GAME1 PANEL1 1394_EN1 LAN_EN1 SB_PWR1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS KBPWR1 CPU_FAN2 FLOPPY1 FRNT_FAN1 Silicon Image SAT ALink Sil3114CT176 CD1 CPU_FAN1 Super I/O CPU_WARN1 2.9 Cable connections ⢠The bundled system cables are pre-connected before shipment. You do not need to disconnect these cables unless you will remove pre-installed components to install additional devices. ⢠Refer to this section when reconnecting cables to ensure correct cable connections. 2.9.1 2.9.1 2.9.1 2.9.1 2.9.1 Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Motherboard connections Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on the motherboard connectors. Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard Standard cables connected to the motherboard 8. CPU fan 2 9. Chassis fan 10. Power supply SMBus 11. Front IEEE 1394 cable 12. Front USB cable 13. Front audio cable 14. Serial ATA connectors 1. 8-pin 12V power 2. 24-pin ATX power 3. Secondary IDE (optical drive) 4. Floppy disk drive 5. Chassis intrusion 6. Front panel cable 7. CPU fan 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9 9 9 9 9 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2.9.2 2.9.2 2.9.2 2.9.2 2.9.2 SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections SATA backplane connections A SATA backplane comes pre-installed in the TW510-E2 AA4 model. The SATA backplane has four SATA signal and power connectors to support Serial ATA hard disk drives. The backplane design incorporates a hot swap feature to allow easy connection or removal of SATA hard disks. The LED on the backplane connect to the front panel LED to indicate HDD status. See section âÂÂ1.6 LED informationâ for details. Front side Front side Front side Front side Front side The front side of the SATA backplane faces the front panel when installed. This side includes four SATA connectors for the hot swap drive trays. Each SATA connector is labeled (CON1, CON3, CON5, CON7) so you can easily determine their counterpart connectors at the back side of the backplane. Refer to the table for reference. HDD HDD HDD HDD HDD Front side Front side Front side Front side Front side Back side Back side Back side Back side Back side Device Device Device Device Device connector connector connector connector connector connector connector connector connector connector HDD 1 CON1 CON2 HDD 2 CON3 CON4 HDD 3 CON5 CON6 HDD 4 CON7 CON8 Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs Drive status LEDs CON1 CON1 CON1 CON1 CON1 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON3 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON5 CON7 CON7 CON7 CON7 CON7
2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 Back side Back side Back side Back side Back side The back side of SATA backplane faces the rear panel when installed. This side includes the power and HDD fan connectors, jumper, SATA interfaces, and SMBus connectors. SMBus connector SMBus connector SMBus connector SMBus connector SMBus connector (upper 6-1 pins) (connects the SMB cable from the motherboard) Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector Fan connector (for HDD fan) Power connectors Power connectors Power connectors Power connectors Power connectors (connect power plugs from the power supply) CON2 CON2 CON2 CON2 CON2 CON4 CON4 CON4 CON4 CON4 CON6 CON6 CON6 CON6 CON6 CON8 CON8 CON8 CON8 CON8 Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector Power SMBus connector (lower 6-1 pins) (connects the SMB cable from the power supply, when available) SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments SATA backplane jumper settings and HDD ID assignments The 6-pin jumper J1 J1 J1 J1 J 1 allows you to define your desired SATA configuration. The picture below shows the location of jumper J1 with pins 1-3 and 2-4 shorted. Refer to the table for the jumper settings and the appropriate ID# for each SATA HDD bay. J1 setting J1 setting J1 setting J1 setting J1 setting (1-3 shorted, 2-4 shorted) Device Device Device Device Device SATA BP ID SATA BP ID SATA BP ID SATA BP ID SATA BP ID Drive Bay 1 CON2 Drive Bay 2 CON4 Drive Bay 3 CON6 Drive Bay 4 CON8
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) One SATA backplane configuration (AA4) The back side SATA connectors are attached to the motherboard SATA connectors controlled by the NVIDIA î CK8-04 chip. Refer to the illustration below for the location of the SATA connectors. Refer to the table below for the default SATA cable connections. Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Backplane Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to Connected to ID ID ID ID ID (on motherboard) (on motherboard) (on motherboard) (on motherboard) (on motherboard) CON2 SATA1 CON4 SATA2 CON6 SATA3 CON8 SATA4 K8N-DL IEEE1394_1 DDR DIMM_A1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) ATX12V1 FP_AUDIO1 A TXPWR1 SATA 4 SATA_RAID1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: RJ-45 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Ke yboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out Top:Line In Bottom: Rear Surround L/R Middle: Side surround L/R Top: Center/Subwoofer PARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 DDR DIMM_A2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) PCI_E1 PCI_E2 PCI2 PCI1 TSB43AB22A BCM5751 ALC850 26.7cm (10.5in) 30.5cm (12in) SATA 3 SOCKET 940 CPU2 SOCKET 940 CPU1 SATA_RAID2 SATA_RAID3 SATA_RAID4 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 SEC_IDE1 SATA1 î SATA2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 GAME1 PANEL1 1394_EN1 LAN_EN1 SB_PWR1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS KBPWR1 CPU_FAN2 FLOPPY1 FRNT_FAN1 Silicon Image SAT ALink Sil3114CT176 CD1 CPU_FAN1 Super I/O CPU_WARN1 S ATA 4 S ATA 3 T A_RAID4 SATA 1 SATA 2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS FRNT_FAN1 SATA3 SATA3 SATA3 SATA3 SATA3 SATA4 SATA4 SATA4 SATA4 SATA4 SATA1 SATA1 SATA1 SATA1 SATA1 SATA2 SATA2 SATA2 SATA2 SATA2
2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2.10 Removable components You may need to remove previously installed system components when installing or removing system devices, or when you need to replace defective components. This section tells how to remove the following components: 5. Front I/O board 6. Chassis footpads and roller wheels 7. Power supply 1. Chassis fan 2. HDD blowers 3. SATA backplane(s) 4. Floppy disk drive module 2.10.1 2.10.1 2.10.1 2.10.1 2.10.1 Chassis fan Chassis fan Chassis fan Chassis fan Chassis fan To remove the chassis fan: 1. Disconnect the 3-pin fan cable from the connector REAR_FAN1 on the motherboard. 2. Press the tabs on the outer corners of the system fan, then pull the fan out of the chassis. 3. Lift the chassis fan case lock hooks, then push the fan from the center of the case until it is detached. Lock hooks Lock hooks Lock hooks Lock hooks Lock hooks
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 To reinstall the chassis fan: 1. Insert the new fan to the chassis fan cage. 4. Pull the fan out from the fan case, then set aside. 2. Firmly hold the chassis fan on the side with the tabs and position it into its slot, making sure that the four hooks underneath the fan match the corresponding holes on the rear panel.
2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 3. Push the fan into the chassis until the four hooks lock securely into the holes on the rear panel. 4. Re-connect the 3-pin fan cable from the connector REAR_FAN1 on the motherboard. 2.10.2 2.10.2 2.10.2 2.10.2 2.10.2 HDD fan HDD fan HDD fan HDD fan HDD fan To remove the HDD fan: 1. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the HDD fan cage to the chassis. 2. Hold the outer side of the fan cage, then pull sideways to release it from the chassis. 3. Disconnect the 3-pin fan cable from the fan connector on the backplane before completely detaching the fan cage from the chassis. Due to space constraints inside the chassis, some cables may interfere with the removal of the fan cage. To easily remove the fan cage, try to slightly push it inward (toward the motherboard) before pulling it out of the chassis.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2. Re-connect the 3-pin fan cable to the fan connector on the backplane. Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane Fan connector on backplane (FAN1) (FAN1) (FAN1) (FAN1) (FAN1) 5. Press the fan case hooks outwards until the fan detaches from the case. 6. Slightly press the center of the fan vent to flush the fan out from the case. Set the HDD fan aside. 4. Locate four fan hooks inside the HDD fan case. 1. Insert a new HDD fan to the fan case until it clicks in place. To re-install the HDD fan:
2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 2-33 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 4. Push the outer edge of the fan cage sideways to fit it to the drive cage. You hear a click when the fan cage correctly fits in place. Side tabs Side tabs Side tabs Side tabs Side tabs Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Outer side of fan cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage Inner edge of drive cage 3. Hold the outer side of the HDD fan cage and hook the two side tabs to the inner edge of the drive cage. Make sure that the system cables are not caught up when you place the HDD fan. 5. Secure the fan cage with the thumb screw.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2.10.3 2.10.3 2.10.3 2.10.3 2.10.3 SATA backplane SATA backplane SATA backplane SATA backplane SATA backplane To remove the SATA backplane: 1. Remove the HDD blower case. Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.2 HDD fanâ for instructions. 2. Disconnect all cables from the SATA backplane. When disconnecting a cable, hold and firmly pull the cable plug. DO NOT pull the cable itself. Doing so may damage the cable! 3. From the inner edge, push the backplane outward so that the outer edge protrudes slightly from the slot. 4. From the outer edge, firmly hold the backplane and carefully slide it out.
2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 2-35 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To reinstall a SATA backplane: 1. Position the backplane into its slot with the component side facing the rear panel, and the power connectors on top. 2. Align the backplane with the rail-like dents on the slot to ensure that it fits securely. 3. Slide the backplane into the slot until it fits. If correctly installed, the outer edge of the backplane aligns with the corner of the drive cage. 4. Connect the appropriate cables to the backplane. Refer to sections âÂÂ2.9.2 SATA backplane connectionsâ for details. Rail-like dents Rail-like dents Rail-like dents Rail-like dents Rail-like dents
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36 2-36 2.10.4 2.10.4 2.10.4 2.10.4 2.10.4 Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive Floppy disk drive 2. Carefully pull out the drive from the chassis until you see the cables connected to the drive. To remove the floppy disk drive: 1. Remove the screw that secures the drive to the chassis. You need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the floppy disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. 3. Disconnect the floppy disk cable and power cable from the drive to completely release the drive.
2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 2-37 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To install a floppy disk drive: 1. Position the floppy drive vertically with the eject button on the left side (close to the HDDs). 2. Connect the drive signal cable and power cable. 4. Secure the drive cage with a screw. 3. Carefully push the drive into the bay until the drive cage fits the front edge of the bay. Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Floppy drive power cable Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on Red stripe to match Pin 1 on the connector the connector the connector the connector the connector Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable Floppy drive signal cable
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-38 2-38 2-38 2-38 2-38 2.10.5 2.10.5 2.10.5 2.10.5 2.10.5 Front I/O board Front I/O board Front I/O board Front I/O board Front I/O board You need to remove the front panel assembly before you can remove the front I/O board. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. To remove the front I/O board: 1. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O board bracket to the front panel. 4. Remove the screw that secures the I/O board to the bracket. 2. Carefully pull out the bracket until you see the cables connected to the I/O board. 3. Disconnect all the cables from the I/O board.
2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 2-39 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To install the front I/O board: 1. Place the I/O board in the bracket, component side up. Secure the front I/O board to the bracket with a screw. 2. Position the I/O board into the bay with the component side to the left (close to the HDDs), then connect the I/O cables to the connectors on the back of the I/O board. Refer to âÂÂ2.9.1 Motherboard connectionsâ for details on cable connections. 3. Insert the I/O board into the bay until the bracket fits the front edge of the bay. 4. Secure the I/O board bracket with a screw.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-40 2-40 2.10.6 2.10.6 2.10.6 2.10.6 2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels Chassis footpads and roller wheels The barebone server system is shipped with four footpads attached to the bottom of the chassis for stability. You need to remove these footpads if: ⢠if you want to replace the footpads with the bundled roller wheels ⢠you wish to install the system to a rack (Refer to âÂÂChapter 3: Installation optionsâ of this user guide, and to the âÂÂRackmount Kitâ user guide for instructions.) To remove the footpads: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a flat screwdriver to flip out the inside layer of a footpad. 3. Remove the footpad by rotating it counterclockwise. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the other three footpads.
2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 2-41 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To remove the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the system chassis on its side. 2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the screws that secure the wheels to the bottom of the chassis. 3. Repeat step 2 to remove the other three roller wheels. Remove the chassis roller wheels if you wish to mount the system to a rack. For convenient transport, install the roller wheels the came with the system package. Each wheel has a brake lock to stabilize the chassis in place. To install the chassis wheels: 1. Lay the chassis in its side. 2. Locate the designated screw holes for each of the four wheel sets. Take note of the numbers alongside each hole when placing screws. 3. Secure each wheel to the bottom of the chassis using four screws. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to install the other three wheels. 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-42 2-42 2.10.7 2.10.7 2.10.7 2.10.7 2.10.7 Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Power suppy unit Refer to this section when removing or installing power supply modules to the barebone system. You MUST disconnect all power cable plugs from the motherboard and other installed devices before removing the power supply unit. The picture below shows the motherboard and device connectors where the power plugs are connected. Refer to the Appendix at the end of this document for the power supply specifications. 1. 24-pin ATX (motherboard power connector; hidden behind the drive cage ) 2. 8-pin 12V (motherboard power connector; hidden behind the drive cage ) 3. 2 x 4-pin plugs (SATA backplane) 4. 4-pin plug (floppy disk drive; hidden ) 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 Make sure to unplug ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL power cables from the system devices before removing the power supply module.
2-43 2-43 2-43 2-43 2-43 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 To remove the 600 W single power supply module: 1. Loosen the thumb screw that secures the power supply metal plate. Do not remove the thumb screw from the metal plate. Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Thumbscrew 2. Hold the metal plate bar and push it downward to release the plate from the chassis. Remove the metal plate completely. 3. Use one hand to push the power supply module from inside the power supply cage, then carefully pull out the module from the chassis. Metal plate bar Metal plate bar Metal plate bar Metal plate bar Metal plate bar
Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-44 2-44 2-44 2-44 2-44 To install a power supply unit: 1. Firmly hold the power supply unit and insert it into the power supply cage. 2. Push the power supply unit all the way in until its outer end aligns with the rear panel. Be careful with the power supply cables when inserting the power supply module into the cage. Due to space constraints, the cables may get entangled with the installed components or other cables, causing the cables to break! 3. Place the metal plate flat on the outer end of the power supply module, flushed to the top of the chassis, while matching the four hooks with their corresponding holes on the rear panel. Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole Hook matched to a hole 4. Hold the metal plate bar and push it upward to lock the hooks to their holes. At the same time, you may also push the top of the metal plate to fit it completely. 5. Secure the metal plate with the thumb screw.
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter describes how to prepare the barebone server for rack mounting. Chapter 3 Installation options
Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options Chapter 3: Installation options 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 The items required for the optional configurations described in this chapter are not included in the standard barebone system package. These items are purchased separately. Preparing the system for rack mounting Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Removing the footpads or roller wheels Refer to section âÂÂ2.10.6 Chassis footpads and roller wheelsâ for instructions on removing the footpads or roller wheels. Removing the top cover Removing the top cover Removing the top cover Removing the top cover Removing the top cover To remove the top cover: 1. Remove the side cover. Refer to section âÂÂ2.1.1 Removing the side coverâ for instructions. 2. Remove the front panel assembly. Refer to section âÂÂ2.5.1 Removing the front panel assemblyâ for instructions. 3. Locate the lock tab underneath the top cover and press it outward to release the cover. 4. Slide the top cover toward the front panel, then lift it up from the chassis. Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Attaching the rack rails Refer to the installation guide that came with the Rackmount Rail Kit for instructions on how to attach the rails and on the barebone server system and the corresponding rails on the industrial rack. Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover Lock tab of top cover (bottom view) (bottom view) (bottom view) (bottom view) (bottom view)
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the server. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. Chapter 4 Motherboard info
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4.1 Motherboard layout K8N-DL IEEE1394_1 DDR DIMM_A1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) A TX12V1 FP_AUDIO1 A TXPWR1 S ATA 4 SA TA_RAID1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power USB2.0 T : USB3 B: USB4 T op: RJ-45 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: K eyboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In Bottom: Rear Surround L/R Middle: Side surround L/R T op: Center/Subwoofer P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O1 SPDIF_O2 DDR DIMM_A2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A3 (72 bit, 184-pin module) PCI_E1 PCI_E2 PCI2 PCI1 TSB43AB22A BCM5751 ALC850 26.7cm (10.5in) 30.5cm (12in) S ATA 3 SOCKET 940 CPU2 SOCKET 940 CPU1 SA TA_RAID2 SA TA_RAID3 SAT A_RAID4 REAR_FAN1 REAR_FAN2 SEC_IDE1 S ATA1 î S ATA2 FRNT_FAN2 PRI_IDE1 USB56 USB78 USB910 BPSMB1 CHASSIS1 RAID_EN1 CLRTC1 GAME1 P ANEL1 1394_EN1 LAN_EN1 SB_PWR1 NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional 4Mb BIOS KBPWR1 CPU_FAN2 FLOPPY1 FRNT_FAN1 Silicon Image SA T ALink Sil31 14CT176 CD1 CPU_FAN1 Super I/O CPU_WARN1
4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Layout contents Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) 4-4 2. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 4-5 3. 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 4-5 4. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) 4-6 5. RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) 4-6 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) 4-7 2. Primary IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE, SEC_IDE) 4-7 3. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 4-8 4. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) 4-9 5. CPU, front, and rear fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) 4-10 6. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) 4-10 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) 4-11 8. IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) 4-11 9. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 8-pin ATX12V1) 4-12 10. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) 4-13 11. Internal audio connectors (4-pin CD1) 4-13 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) 4-14 13. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) 4-14 14. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) 4-15
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4.2 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! K8N-DL î K8N-DL Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal (Default) Clear CMOS 12 23
4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default is the Space Bar). This feature requires an ATX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) 1394 controller setting (3-pin 1394_EN1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard TI 1394a IEEE 1394 controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the 1394 feature. K8N-DL î K8N-DL Keyboard power setting KBPWR1 1 2 (Default) 5V 5VSB 2 3 K8N-DL î K8N-DL 1394 function setting 1394_EN Enable (Default) Disable 23 12
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) Gigabit LAN controller setting (3-pin LAN1_EN1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Broadcom î BCM5751 Gigabit LAN1 controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the Gigabit LAN feature. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) RAID controller setting (3-pin RAID_EN1) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the onboard Silicon Image î 3114R RAID controller. Set to pins 1-2 to activate the RAID feature. K8N-DL î RAID_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 23 12 K8N-DL RAID controller setting K8N-DL î K8N-DL CPU LAN1_EN setting LAN1_EN1 Enable (Default) Disable 3 2 2 1
4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) These connectors are for Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cables. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 4.3 Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. ⢠The Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for UltraDMA 100/66 IDE devices. K8N-DL î NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY1 K8N-DL Floppy disk drive connector K8N-DL IDE connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. SEC_IDE1 PRI_IDE1 PIN 1 K8N-DL î
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) Supported by the NVIDIA î nForce4⢠chipset, these connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives that allows up to 3Gb/s of data transfer rate. If you installed Serial ATA hard disk drives, you can create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 1 0, or S/W RAID 5 configuration. Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA Important note on Serial ATA The actual data transfer rate depends on the speed of Serial ATA hard disks installed. K8N-DL î S ATA 4 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXN4 RSA T A_RXP4 GND S ATA 3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXN3 RSA T A_RXP3 GND K8N-DL SA T A connectors S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXN2 RSA T A_RXP2 GND S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXN1 RSA T A_RXP1 GND
4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, Serial ATA RAID connectors (7-pin SATA_RAID1, SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) SATA_RAID2, SATA_RAID3, SATA_RAID4) Supported by the Silicon Image î Sil3114 RAID controller, these connectors are for Serial ATA signal cables. These connectors support up to four Serial ATA hard disk drives that can be configured as a disk array through the onboard Silicon Image Sil3114 SATA RAID controller. ⢠Before creating a RAID configuration, make sure that you have connected the Serial ATA cables to these connectors and have installed the Serial ATA hard disks drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Silicon Image RAID utility and Serial ATA BIOS setup during POST. ⢠The RAID 5 driver is not Windows Hardware Quality Labs (WHQL) certified. K8N-DL î K8N-DL SA T A RAID connectors SA T A_RAID1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXN1 RSA T A_RXP1 GND SA T A_RAID2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXN2 RSA T A_RXP2 GND GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXN3 RSA T A_RXP3 GND SA T A_RAID3 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXN4 RSA T A_RXP4 GND SA T A_RAID4
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors CPU, front, and rear fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, (3-pin CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2, FRNT_FAN1, FRNT_FAN2, REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) REAR-FAN1, REAR_FAN2) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350mA~ 2000mA ( 24 W max.) or a total of 1A~3.4 8A (41.7 6 W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. ⢠Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Lack of sufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors! ⢠The ASUS Smart Q-Fan function is supported using the CPU fans (CPU_FAN1, CPU_FAN2) connectors. ⢠The chipset fan is synchronized with the CPU fans. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) Backplane SMBus connector (6-1 pin BPSMB1) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and /or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. K8N-DL î GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN1 REAR_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V FRNT_F AN2 GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN2 FRNT_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V REAR_F AN2 K8N-DL Fan connectors GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V CPU_F AN1 REAR_F AN1 FRNT_F AN2 CPU_F AN2 FRNT_F AN1 REAR_F AN2 K8N-DL î K8N-DL SMBus connector BPSMB1 1 I2C_4_CLK# GND I2C_4_DA T A# 5VSB F AN_PWM
4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78, USB910) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB cable from the USB/GAME port module to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) IEEE 1394 connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) This connector is for the IEEE 1394a module. Connect the IEEE 1394 module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable USB cable t o the IEEE 1394 connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! K8N-DL î K8N-DL USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 USB910 USB 5V USB_P10- USB_P10 GND NC USB 5V USB_P9- USB_P9 GND 1 K8N-DL î K8N-DL IEEE-1394 connector IE1394_1 1 GND 12V TPB0- GND TP A0- 12V TPB0 GND TP A0
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR1, 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) 8-pin ATX12V1) These connectors are for an ATX power supply plugs. The power supply plugs are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠Make sure that your power supply unit (PSU) can provide at least the minimum power required by your system. See the table below for details. K8N-DL î K8N-DL A TX Power connectors For Power Supply with 20-pin Power Connector 24-pin Power Connector GND 12V GND 12V GND 12V GND 12V 8-pin 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground
4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME1) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the GAME cable from the USB/GAME port module to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) Internal audio connector (4-pin CD1) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM. The function of this connector is disabled in 8-channel mode. K8N-DL î GAME1 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN 5V J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V K8N-DL Game connector K8N-DL î CD1 (Black) Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground K8N-DL Internal audio connector
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO1) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports legacy AC âÂÂ97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector. K8N-DL î CHASSIS1 (Default) 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND K8N-DL Chassis intrusion connector K8N-DL î FP_AUDIO1 BLINE_OUT_L MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L BLINE_OUT_R NC MICPWR 5V A AGND K8N-DL Front panel audio connector
4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) System panel connector (20-pin PANEL1) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin HDD_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPKO) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system ON or puts the system in SLEEP or SOFT-OFF mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. The system panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. K8N-DL î K8N-DL System panel connector P ANEL1 * Requires an A TX power supply . PLED- PWR 5V Speaker PLED GND RESET GND Reset Ground Ground PLED HD_LED- HD_LED HD_LED SPKO PWRSW MLED MLED- MLED
Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info Chapter 4: Motherboard info 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. Chapter 5 BIOS setup
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility Award BIOS Flash Utility (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 3. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS in DOS using a floppy disk or the motherboard support CD.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Star t.ss Windows î 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AwardBIOS Flash utilities.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . d. From the Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D: is your optical drive. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 5.1.2 Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS Updating the BIOS The Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) can be updated using the AwardBIOS Flash Utility. Follow these instructions to update the BIOS using this utility. 1. Download the latest BIOS file from the ASUS web site. Rename the file to K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN K8N-DL.BIN and save it to a floppy disk. Save only the updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to avoid loading the wrong BIOS file. 2. Copy the AwardBIOS Flash Utility (awdflash.exe) from the Software folder of the support CD to the floppy disk with the latest BIOS file. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode using the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 4. When the A:> A:> A:> A:> A : > appears, replace the bootable floppy disk with the floppy disk containing the new BIOS file and the Award BIOS Flash Utility. 5. At the prompt, type awdflash awdflash awdflash awdflash awdflash then press <Enter>. The Award BIOS Flash Utility screen appears. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please input File Name! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program:
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 6. Type the BIOS file name in the File Name to File Name to File Name to File Name to File Name to Program Program Program Program Program field, then press <Enter>. 7. Press <N> when the utility prompts you to save the current BIOS file. The following screen appears. 8. The utility verifies the BIOS file in the floppy disk and starts flashing the BIOS file. Do not turn off or reset the system during the flashing process! AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Warning: DonâÂÂt Turn Off Power Or Reset System! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Program Flashing Memory - OFE00 OK Write OK No Update Write Fail Message: Do You Want To Save BIOS (Y/N) 9. The utility displays a Flashing Complete Flashing Complete Flashing Complete Flashing Complete Flashing Complete message indicating that you have successfully flashed the BIOS file. Remove the floppy disk then press <F1> to restart the system. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved F1 Reset For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Flashing Complete Press <F1> to Continue Write OK No Update Write Fail
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 3. Type a filename for the current BIOS file in the Save current BIOS Save current BIOS Save current BIOS Save current BIOS Save current BIOS as as as as a s field, then press <Enter>. 4. The utility saves the current BIOS file to the floppy disk, then returns to the BIOS flashing process. 5.1.3 5.1.3 5.1.3 5.1.3 5.1.3 Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file Saving the current BIOS file You can use the AwardBIOS Flash Utility to save the current BIOS file. You can load the current BIOS file when the BIOS file gets corrupted during the flashing process. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Save current BIOS as: AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please Wait! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Checksum: DAD6H Save current BIOS as: old.bin AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please Wait! For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 1001.bin Now Backup System BIOS to File! To save the current BIOS file using the AwardBIOS Flash Utility: 1. Follow steps 1 to 6 of the previous section. 2. Press <Y> when the utility prompts you to save the current BIOS file. The following screen appears. Make sure that the floppy disk has enough disk space to save the file.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the CD for the BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... Found CDROM, try to Boot from it... Pass When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device...
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any CD from the optical drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. When no CD is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Award BootBlock BIOS v1.0 Copyright (c) 2000, Award Software, Inc. BIOS ROM checksum error Detecting IDE ATAPI device... Found CDROM, try to Boot from it... Fail Detecting floppy drive A media...
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. Insert Disk then press Enter or ESC to continue POST 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive then press <Enter>. The following screen appears. AwardBIOS Flash Utility for ASUS V1.01 (C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. All Rights Reserved Message: Please wait... For NF-KC804-K8N-DL-00 DATE: 02/01/2005 Flash Type - SST 49LF004A/B /3.3V File Name to Program: 5. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable Low-Pin Count (LPC) chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 5.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the LPC chip. The LPC chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ5.7 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Change the internal clock. System Time 15 : 30 : 36 System Date Wed, Feb 2 2005 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Primary IDE Master [None] Primary IDE Slave [None] Secondary IDE Master [None] Secondary IDE Slave [None] Third IDE Master [None] Fourth IDE Master [None] IDE Channel 4 Master [None] IDE Channel 5 Master [None] Base Memory 256K Extended Memory 261120K Total Memory 262144K Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ6.2.7 Pop-up window.â 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar Legend bar At the bottom of the Setup screen is a legend bar. The keys in the legend bar allow you to navigate through the various setup menus. The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their corresponding functions. Navigation Key Navigation Key Navigation Key Navigation Key Navigation Key Function Function Function Function Function <F1> <F1> <F1> <F1> <F1> Displays the General Help screen <F5> <F5> <F5> <F5> <F5> Loads setup default values <Esc> <Esc> <Esc> <Esc> <Esc> Exits the BIOS setup or returns to the main menu from a sub-menu Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Left or Right arrow Selects the menu item to the left or right Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Up or Down arrow Moves the highlight up or down between fields Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Page Down or â (minus) Scrolls backward through the values for the highlighted field Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Page Up or (plus) Scrolls forward through the values for the highlighted field <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> <Enter> Brings up a selection menu for the highlighted field <F10> <F10> <F10> <F10> <F10> Saves changes and exit
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5.2.7 5.2.7 5.2.7 5.2.7 5.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 5.2.8 5.2.8 5.2.8 5.2.8 5.2.8 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Change the internal clock. System Time 15 : 30 : 36 System Date Wed, Feb 2 2005 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Primary IDE Master [None] Primary IDE Slave [None] Secondary IDE Master [None] Secondary IDE Slave [None] Third IDE Master [None] Fourth IDE Master [None] IDE Channel 4 Master [None] IDE Channel 5 Master [None] Base Memory 256K Extended Memory 261120K Total Memory 262144K Legacy Diskette A: Disabled ..... [ ] 360K , 5.25 in. ..... [ ] 1.2M , 5.25 in. ..... [ ] 720K , 3.5 in. ..... [ ] 1.44M, 3.5 in. ..... [ ] 2.88M, 3.5 in. ..... [ ] âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ :Move ENTER:Accept ESC:Abort Pop-up menu Pop-up menu Pop-up menu Pop-up menu Pop-up menu
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 5.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4 5.3.4 Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] This feature allows reading and writing of 1.2 MB (as opposed to 1.44 MB) data on a 3.5-inch floppy disk. This is required to support Japanese standard floppy drives. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Drive A] 5.3.5 5.3.5 5.3.5 5.3.5 5.3.5 Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] Base/Extended/Total Memory [xxxxxxK] The base memory, extended memory, and the total memory values are auto-detected. These fields are not user-configurable. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Change the internal clock. System Time 15 : 30 : 36 System Date Wed, Feb 2 2005 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Floppy 3 Mode Support [Disabled] Primary IDE Master [None] Primary IDE Slave [None] Secondary IDE Master [None] Secondary IDE Slave [None] Third IDE Master [None] Fourth IDE Master [None] IDE Channel 4 Master [None] IDE Channel 5 Master [None] Base Memory xxxK Extended Memory xxxxxxK Total Memory xxxxxxK
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.3.6 5.3.6 5.3.6 5.3.6 5.3.6 Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master Primary IDE Master The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Capacity, Cylinder, Head, Precomp, Landing Zone, Sector, and Transfer Mode, and S.M.A.R.T Status). These values are not user-configurable. These items show âÂÂ0â or âÂÂNoneâ if no IDE device is installed in the system. PIO Mode PIO Mode PIO Mode PIO Mode PIO Mode Sets the PIO mode for the IDE device. The settings Mode 0 to 4 allow successive increase in performance. Configuration options: [Auto] [Mode 0] [Mode 1] [Mode 2] [Mode 3] [Mode 4] UDMA Mode UDMA Mode UDMA Mode UDMA Mode UDMA Mode When this item is set to [Auto], the UDMA capability allows improved transfer speeds and data integrity for supported IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Select [Auto] to automatically detect an IDE hard disk drive. If automatic detection is successful, the BIOS automatically fills in the correct values for the remaining fields on this sub-menu. If the hard disk was already formatted on a previous system, the BIOS may detect incorrect parameters. Select [Manual] to manually enter the IDE hard disk drive parameters. Refer to the next section âÂÂManually detecting an IDE drive.â If no drive is installed select [None]. Configuration options: [None] [Auto] [Manual] While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Select Menu Item Specific Help Set a PIO mode for the IDE device. Mode0 through 4 successive increase in performance. Primary IDE Master PIO Mode [Auto] UDMA Mode [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Capacity 0 MB Cylinder 0 Head 0 Precomp 0 Landing Zone 0 Sector 0 Transfer Mode None S.M.A.R.T Status None
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Before attempting to configure a hard disk drive, make sure you have the correct configuration information supplied by the drive manufacturer. Incorrect settings may cause the system to fail to recognize the installed hard disk. Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Allows selection of the sector addressing mode. The default [Auto] allows automatic detection of an IDE hard disk drive. Select [CHS] for this item if you set the Primary IDE Master to [Manual] to manually enter the drive information. Configuration options: [CHS] [LBA] [Large] [Auto] Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive Manually detecting an IDE drive To manually enter the drive information, set the Primary IDE Master item to [Manual], and the Access Mode item to [CHS]. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Select Menu Item Specific Help Set a PIO mode for the IDE device. Mode0 through 4 successive increase in performance. Primary IDE Master PIO Mode [Auto] UDMA Mode [Auto] Primary IDE Master [Manual] Access Mode [CHS] Capacity 0 MB Cylinder 0 Head 0 Precomp 0 Landing Zone 0 Sector 0 Transfer Mode None S.M.A.R.T Status None To enter the number of cylinder, head, precomp, landing zone, sector per track for the drive, highlight an item, key-in the value that you obtained from the drive label or documentation, then press <Enter>. To enter a value, you may also highlight the item, then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu. Type in the value indicated in the drive label or documentation, the press <Enter>. Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Displays the auto-detected hard disk capacity. Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Cylinder Shows the number of the hard disk cylinders.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 Head Head Head Head Head Shows the number of the hard disk read/write heads. Precomp Precomp Precomp Precomp Precomp Displays the precompressed volumes on the hard disk, if any. Landing Zone Landing Zone Landing Zone Landing Zone Landing Zone Displays the driveâÂÂs maximum usable capacity as calculated by the BIOS based on the drive information that you entered. Sector Sector Sector Sector Sector Shows the number of sectors per track. Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Transfer Mode Shows the data transfer mode if the hard disk supports this feature. Otherwise, this item is grayed out and shows the value [None]. S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status S.M.A.R.T Status Shows the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T) status if the hard disk supports this feature. Otherwise, this item is grayed out and show the value [None]. After entering the IDE hard disk drive information, use a disk utility, such as FDISK, to partition and format new IDE hard disk drives. This is necessary so that you can write or read data from the hard disk. Make sure to set the partition of the Primary IDE hard disk drives to âÂÂActive.â 5.3.7 5.3.7 5.3.7 5.3.7 5.3.7 Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave Primary IDE Slave When configuring a drive as Primary IDE Slave, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.8 5.3.8 5.3.8 5.3.8 5.3.8 Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master When configuring a drive as Secondary IDE Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.9 5.3.9 5.3.9 5.3.9 5.3.9 Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Slave When configuring a drive as Secondary IDE Slave, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions.
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.3.10 5.3.10 5.3.10 5.3.10 5.3.10 Third IDE Master Third IDE Master Third IDE Master Third IDE Master Third IDE Master When configuring a drive as Primary IDE Slave, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions which are not discussed in this section. Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive Extended IDE Drive When set to [Auto], allows automatic selection of the extended IDE drive installed, if any. Set this item to [None] if there is no extended IDE drive, or if you do not wish to detect the drive even if installed. Configuration options: [None] [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Allows selection of the sector addressing mode. Configuration options: [Large] [Auto] 5.3.11 5.3.11 5.3.11 5.3.11 5.3.11 Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master Fourth IDE Master When configuring a drive as Fourth IDE Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ and section âÂÂ6.3.10 Third IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.12 5.3.12 5.3.12 5.3.12 5.3.12 IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master IDE Channel 4 Master When configuring a drive as IDE Channel 4 Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ and section âÂÂ6.3.10 Third IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. 5.3.13 5.3.13 5.3.13 5.3.13 5.3.13 IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master IDE Channel 5 Master When configuring a drive as IDE Channel 5 Master, refer to section âÂÂ6.3.6 Primary IDE Masterâ and section âÂÂ6.3.10 Third IDE Masterâ for the menu item descriptions. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Select Menu Item Specific Help Set a PIO mode for the IDE device. Mode0 through 4 successive increase in performance. Primary IDE Master Extended IDE Drive [Auto] Access Mode [Auto] Capacity 0 MB Cylinder 0 Head 0 Precomp 0 Landing Zone 0 Sector 0 Transfer Mode None S.M.A.R.T Status None
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration 5.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] Disables or enables the CPU L1/L2 cache. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] Disables or enables the CPU L3 cache. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit CPU Configuration Memory Configuration Chipset Onboard Device PCIPnP USB Configuration F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Press Enter to set F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable CPU L1/L2 cache. CPU Configuration CPU Internal Cache [Enabled] External Cache [Enabled] CPU Frequency [200.0] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Memory Configuration This menu shows the memory configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] Timing Mode [Auto] When set to [Auto], BIOS detects the DRAM configurations automatically. Setting to [Manual] allows you to set the DRAM timing configurations from the available options. Configuration options: [Auto] [Manual] The items Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value Memclock Index Value , CAS# latency CAS# latency CAS# latency CAS# latency CAS# latency , Min RAS# Min RAS# Min RAS# Min RAS# Min RAS# Active Time Active Time Active Time Active Time Active Time , RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay RAS# to CAS# Delay , and Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time Row Precharge Time become configurable only when the Timing Mode item is set to [Manual]. Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200MHz] Allows selection of the DRAM frequency. Configuration options: [100Mhz] [133Mhz] [166Mhz] [200Mhz] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] Sets the latency (in clocks) between the DRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [2] [2.5] [3] Select Menu Item Specific Help <Enter> to select DRAM configuration by [Auto] (recommended). [Manual allows you to set each configuration on your own. Memory Configuration Timing Mode [Auto] Memclock Index Value (Mhz) [200Mhz] CAS# Latency (Tcl) [2.5] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] Master ECC Enabled [Enabled] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] CPU Frequency [200.0] Allows you to select the CPU frequency. Configuration options: [200.0] [201.0] [202.0] ... [400.0] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet Control [Enabled] Disables or enables the AMD K8 Cool âÂÂnâ Quiet feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Min RAS# Active Time (Tras) [ 8T] Controls the number of DRAM clocks used for DRAM parameters. Configuration options: [5T] [6T] [7T] [8T] [9T] [10T] [11T] [12T] [13T] [14T] [15T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] RAS# to CAS# Delay (Trcd) [ 4T] Controls the latency between the DRAM active command and the read/ write command. Configuration options: [2T] [3T] [4T] [5T] [6T] [7T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Row Precharge Time (Trp) [ 2T] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DRAM. Configuration options: [2T] [3T] [4T] [5T] [6T] [7T] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Node Memory Interleaving [Disabled] Enables or disables memory interleaving. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] S/W Memory Hole Remapping [Enabled] Allows memory hoisting/remapping of the memory-mapped I/O address hole to above 4GB system memory. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] MTRR Mapping Mode [Continuous] Allows selection of [Continuous] for standard mode, or [Discreet] for aggressive mode. Configuration options: [Continuous] [Discreet] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Master ECC Enable [Enabled] Enables or disables ECC check/correct mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] ECC Memory Interlock [At Least One] Allows selection for DIMMs that are ECC-compliant. Configuration options: [At Least One] [All are] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] ECC MCE Enable [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], a machine-check exception (#MC) occurs whenever an machine-check error that may not be corrected is encountered. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] Chip-Kill Mode Enable [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], allows ECC checking to be based on a 128/16 data/ECC rather than on a 64/8 data/ECC. You may only enable this feature in 128-bit DRAM data width mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] ECC Redirection [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], correctable errors are corrected as the data is passed to the requestor. The data in the DRAM is not corrected if this item is set to [Disabled]. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] DRAM Background Scrubber [Disabled] Specifies the scrub rate of the next address to be scrubbed by the DRAM scrubber. Configuration options: [Disabled] [40.0ns] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] L2 Cache Background Scrubber [Disabled] Specifies the scrub rate of the next address to be scrubbed by the L2 cache scrubber. Configuration options: [Disabled] [40.0ns] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] DCache Background Scrubber [Disabled] Specifies the scrub rate of the next address to be scrubbed by the data cache scrubber. Configuration options: [Disabled] [40.0ns] 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 5.4.3 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset This menu shows the chipset configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip IDE channel 0. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip IDE channel 1. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable OnChip IDE Channel0. Chipset OnChip IDE Channel0 [Enabled] OnChip IDE Channel1 [Enabled] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Width [ â â â â â 16 â â â â â 16] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] Init Display First [PCI Slot] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 5-25 Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Hyper Transport Frequency [4x] Allows selection of hyper transport frequency. Configuration options: [1x] [2x] [3x] [4x] [5x] Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ Hyper Transport Width [ â â â â â 16 16 16 16 16 â â â â â 16] 16] 16] 16] 16] Allows selection of hyper transport frequency. Configuration options: [ âÂÂ8 â 8][âÂÂ16 âÂÂ8] [ âÂÂ8 âÂÂ16] [ â 16 â 16] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Errata 94 Enhanced [Auto] Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] System BIOS Cacheable [Disabled] Enables or disables the cache function of the system BIOS. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] Enables or disables the CPU spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] SATA Spread Spectrum [Disabled] Enables or disables SATA spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Disabled] Enables or disables PCIE spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] SSE/SSE2 Instructions [Enabled] Enables or disables the SSE instructions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Init Display First [PCI Slot] Allows you to select the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [PCI Slot] [PCIEx] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] IDE DMA Transfer Access [Enabled] Enables or disables the switch to support IDE DMA transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 1 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip SATA1 (ports 1 and 2). Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 5.4.4 Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device This menu shows the onboard device configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options, or a sub-menu with additional items. Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable Speech IC controller. Onboard Device Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Disabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard LAN Boot ROM [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] NVRAID Configuration Super I/O Device SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA DMA Transfer [Enabled] Enables or disables the switch to support SATA DMA transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Serial-ATA 2 [Enabled] Enables or disables the on-chip SATA2 (ports 3 and 4). Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] SATA2 DMA Transfer [Enabled] Enables or disables the switch to support SATA2 DMA transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] IDE Prefetch Mode [Enabled] Enables or disables the IDE Prefetch mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Speech IC Reporter [Enabled] Enables or disables the speech IC controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Enables or disables the speech IC IDE error report. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 5-27 Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Enables or disables the speech IC system error report. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Onboard Silicon SATALink [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard Silicon Image SATALink device. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Onboard 1394 [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard 1394 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Onboard Broadcom 5751 LAN [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Onboard AC97 Audio [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard AC97 audio controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration This sub-menu contains RAID-related function items. Select the items that you wish to enable to create a RAID set. F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Disable/Enable NVIDIA RAID feature. NVRAID Configuration RAID Enable [Disabled] IDE Primary Master RAID [Disabled] IDE Primary Slave RAID [Disabled] IDE Secondary Master RAID [Disabled] IDE Secondary Slave RAID [Disabled] First SATA Master RAID [Disabled] Second SATA Master RAID [Disabled] Third SATA Master RAID [Disabled] Fourth SATA Master RAID [Disabled] RAID Enable [Disabled] Enables or disables the NVIDIA RAID feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 5-28 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Super I/O Device Super I/O Device Super I/O Device Super I/O Device Super I/O Device This sub-menu contains RAID-related function items. Select the items that you wish to enable to create a RAID set. Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the serial port 1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] [Auto] Onboard Parallel Port [378/IRQ7] Allows you to select the parallel port base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378/IRQ7] [278/IRQ5] [3BC/IRQ7] Parallel Port Mode [SPP] Allows you to select the parallel port mode. Configuration options: [SPP] [EPP] [ECP] [ECP EPP] [Normal] IDE Primary Master/Slave, IDE Secondary Master/Slave RAID [Disabled] When enabled, allows you to use the device/s for creating a RAID set. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] First/Second/Third/Fourth SATA Master RAID [Disabled] When enabled, allows you to use the device/s for creating a RAID set. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Set base I/O address for serial port 1. Super I/O Device Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Onboard Parallel Port [378/IRQ7] Parallel Port Mode [SPP] EPP Mode Select EPP1.7 ECP Mode Use DMA 3 Game Port Address [201] Midi Port Address [330] Midi Port IRQ [10]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 5-29 EPP Mode Select [EPP1.7] Allows you to select the version of EPP mode. This item becomes configurable only if the Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode i s set to [ECP] or [ECP EPP]. Configuration options: [EPP1.9] [EPP1.7] ECP Mode Use DMA [3] Allows you to configure the parallel port DMA channel for the selected ECP mode. This item becomes configurable only if the Parallel Port Parallel Port Parallel Port Parallel Port Parallel Port Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode i s set to [ECP] or [ECP EPP]. Configuration options: [1] [3] Game Port Address [201] Allows you to select the game port address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [201] [209] Midi Port Address [330] Allows you to select the MIDI port address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [330] [300] [290] Midi Port IRQ [10] Allows you to select the MIDI port IRQ. Configuration options: [5] [10]
5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 5-30 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced 5.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.5 5.4.5 PCIPnP PCIPnP PCIPnP PCIPnP PCIPnP This menu shows the PCIPnP configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Select Menu Item Specific Help BIOS can automatically configure all the boot and Plug and Play compatible devices. If you choose Auto, you cannot select IRQ DMA and memory base address fields, since BIOS automatically assigns them. PCIPnP Resources Controlled By [Auto] IRQ Resources PCI/VGA Pallete Snoop [Disabled] ** PCI Express relative items ** Maximum Payload Size [4096] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Resources Controlled By [Auto] Allows automatic or manual assignments of IRQ resources to boot devices and Plug and Play devices. Configuration options: [Auto] [Manual] When the item Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By i s set to [Auto], the item IRQ Resources is grayed out and not user-configurable. Refer to the section âÂÂIRQ Resourcesâ for information on how to enable this item. PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] PCI/VGA Pallet Snoop [Disabled] Some non-standard VGA cards, like graphics accelerators or MPEG video cards, may not show colors properly. Setting this field to [Enabled] corrects this problem. If you are using a standard VGA card, leave this field to the default setting [Disabled]. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Maximum Payload Size [4096] Sets the maximum TLP payload size (in bytes) for PCI Express devices. Configuration options: [128] [256] [512] [1024] [2048] [4096]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 5-31 Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources Select Menu Item Specific Help BIOS can automatically configure all the boot and Plug and Play compatible devices. If you choose Auto, you cannot select IRQ DMA and memory base address PCIPnP Resources Controlled By [Manual] IRQ Resources PCI/VGA Pallete Snoop [Disabled] ** PCI Express relative items ** Maximum Payload Size [4096] Set the item Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By Resources Controlled By t o [Manual] to enable the item IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources IRQ Resources and assign the interrupts depending on the type of installed PCI devices. IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Legacy ISA for devices compliant with the original PC AT bus specification, PCI/ISA PnP for devices compliant with the Plug and Play standard whether designed for PCI or ISA bus architecture. IRQ Resources IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-12 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device]
5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup 5.4.6 5.4.6 5.4.6 5.4.6 5.4.6 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration This menu shows the USB configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] USB Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Setting this item to [Enabled] allows the built-in high speed USB support in the BIOS to turn on automatically when you install high speed USB devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable support for the legacy USB devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Advanced Select Menu Item Specific Help Enable/Disable USB 2.0 and legay controller. USB Configuration USB Controller [Enabled] USB2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB Legacy Mode Support [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 5-33 Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit 5.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the ACPI and Advanced Power Management (APM) features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ACPI feature on the operating system. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1(POS)] [S3(STR)] [S1&S3] Select Menu Item Specific Help Enable/Disable ACPI support for Operating System. ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI Suspend Type [S1&S3] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor
5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 5-34 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 5.5.1 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration This menu shows the Advanced Powed Management (APM) configuration settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Select Menu Item Specific Help This field allows you to set the automatic power saving features. APM Configuration Power Management [User Define] HDD Power Down [Disabled] Video Off Method [PDMS Support] Soft-Off by PBTN [Instant-Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] USB Wake-Up From S1/S3 [Disabled] Power-On By Alarm [Disabled] Day of Month Alarm 0 Time (hh:mm:ss) 0 : 0 : 0 Power On Function [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Power Management [User Define] Allows you to set the automatic power saving features. Configuration options: [User Define] [Min Saving] [Max Saving] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] HDD Power Down [Disabled] Shuts down any hard disk drives in the system after a period of inactivity as set in this field. Configuration options: [Disabled] [1 Min] [2 Min]... [15 Min] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Video Off Method [DPMS Support] Allows you to select the video off method. The Display Power Management System (DPMS) feature allows the BIOS to control the video display card if it supports DPMS. [Blank Screen] only blanks the screen. Use this for monitors without power management or âÂÂgreenâ features. Configuration options: [Blank Screen] [V/H Sync Blank] [DPMS Support] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] Soft-Off By PBTN [Instant-Off] When set to [Instant-Off], the system goes to soft-off when you press the power button for less than 4 seconds. When set to [Delay 4 Sec], the system power goes off when you press the power button for more than 4 seconds. Configuration options: [Delay 4 Sec] [Instant-Off] Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 5-35 Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to [Power Off], the system goes into âÂÂoff stateâ after an AC power interruption. When set to [Power On], the system turns on automatically after a power interruption. When set to [Last State], the system goes into whatever was the system state (on or off) before the power interruption. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PME to generate a wake-up event. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] WOR(RI#) From Soft-Off [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable wake-up on ring. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] USB Wake-up From S1/S3 [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable wake-up from S1/S3 by USB keyboard or mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Power On By Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake-up event. When this item is enabled, the items Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm Date of Month Alarm and Time Time Time Time Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm (hh:mm:ss) Alarm items become user-configurable with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] Day of Month Alarm [0] To set the date of alarm, highlight this item and press <Enter> to display the Day of Month Alarm pop-up menu. Key-in a value within the specified range then press <Enter>. Configuration options: [Min=0] [Max=31] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] Time (hh:mm:ss) Alarm [0 : 0 : 0] To set the time of alarm: 1. Highlight this item and press <Enter> to display a pop-up menu for the hour field. 2. Key-in a value (Min=0, Max=23), then press <Enter>. 3. Press <TAB> to move to the minutes field then press <Enter>. 4. Key-in a minute value (Min=0, Max=59), then press <Enter>. 5. Press <TAB> to move to the seconds field then press <Enter>. 6. Key-in a value (Min=0, Max=59), then press <Enter>.
5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Power On Function [Disabled] Allows you to define specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Ctrl ESC] [Space Bar] [Power Key] [Any Key] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Up By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 5.5.2 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor This menu shows the hardware monitoring status. Select an item, then press Enter to display a pop-up menu with the configuration options. Select Menu Item Specific Help Press enter to view. Hardware Monitor Voltage Monitor Smart Q-Fan Configuration System Temperature 39 o C/102 o F CPU1 Temperature 39 o C/102 o F CPU2 Temperature 29 o C/84 o F CPU Fan1 speed 2925 RPM CPU Fan2 speed 2925 RPM Front Fan1 speed 0 RPM Front Fan2 speed 0 RPM Rear Fan1 speed 0 RPM Rear Fan2 speed 0 RPM Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 5-37 Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor Voltage Monitor CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V CPU VCORE A/B (V), 3.3 Voltage, 12V Voltage, 1.5V Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, Voltage, 2.5V Voltage, 5VCC Voltage, 5VSB Voltage, VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage VBAT Voltage These fields show the auto-detected voltages through the onboard voltage regulators. CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU1 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage CPU2 DDR Voltage Allow you to adjust the DDR voltage. Configuration options: [2.60V] [2.70V] [2.80V] [2.90V] Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Chipset Voltage Allow you to adjust the chipset voltage. Configuration options: [1.50V] [1.60V] [1.70V] [1.80V] CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU1 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control CPU2 Voltage Control Allow you to select the CPU voltages. Configuration options: [Default VID or plus 100mV] [Default VID] Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Hyper Transport Voltage Allow you to adjust the chipset voltage. Configuration options: [1.20V] [1.25V] [1.30V] [1.35V] F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Voltage Monitor CPU VCORE A (V) 1.53 V CPU VCORE B (V) N/A 3.3 Voltage 3.28 V 12V Voltage 11.91 V 1.5V Voltage 1.56 V 2.5V Voltage 2.54 V 5VCC Voltage 4.99 V 5VSB Voltage 4.96 V VBAT Voltage 3.10 V CPU1 DDR Voltage [2.60V] CPU2 DDR Voltage [2.60V] Chipset Voltage [1.50V] CPU1 Voltage Control [Default VID 100mV] CPU2 Voltage Control [Default VID 100mV] Hyper Transport Voltage [1.20V] Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-38 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Press enter to select enable/disable Smart Fan. Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Fan Control [Disabled] System Target Temperature 50 CPU1 Target Temperature 55 CPU1 Target Temperature 55 Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Q-Fan Configuration Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Smart Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Smart Fan feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ⢠The System/CPU1/CPU2 Target Temperature items become configurable only when you set Smart Fan Control to [Enabled]. ⢠When the actual system/CPU1/CPU2 temperature becomes equal to the target temperature set in the following fields, the respective fan will run at full speed. System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] System Target Temperature [50] Allows you to set the target temperature for the system. Configuration options: [Min=20] [Max=50] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] CPU1 Target Temperature [55] Allows you to set the target temperature for CPU1. Configuration options: [Min=30] [Max=60] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] CPU2 Target Temperature [55] Allows you to set the target temperature for CPU1. Configuration options: [Min=30] [Max=60]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 5-39 Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit 5.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot settings. Select an item then press Enter to display a sub-menu with additional items, or show a pop-up menu with the configuration options. 5.6.1 5.6.1 5.6.1 5.6.1 5.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 1st Boot Device [Removable] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk] These items allow you to select your boot device priority. Configuration options: [Removable] [Hard Disk] [CDROM] [Legacy LAN] [Disabled] Select Menu Item Specific Help Select Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Removable Device Priority Boot Settings Configuration Security F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Select your boot device priority Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [Removable] 2nd Boot Device [CDROM] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Disk]
5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 5-40 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.6.2 5.6.2 5.6.2 5.6.2 5.6.2 Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority Hard Disk Boot Priority 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 5.6.3 Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Removable Device Priority Select Menu Item Specific Help Use <up> or <down> arrow to select a device, the press < > to move it up, or <-> to move it down the list. Press <ESC> to exit this menu. Removable Device Priority 1. Floppy Disks F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit Select Menu Item Specific Help Use <up> or <down> arrow to select a device, the press < > to move it up, or <-> to move it down the list. Press <ESC> to exit this menu. Hard Disk Boot Priority 1. Bootable Add-in Cards
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-41 5-41 5-41 5-41 5-41 F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.6.4 5.6.4 5.6.4 5.6.4 5.6.4 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Select Menu Item Specific Help Select your boot device priority. Boot Settings Configuration Boot Other Device [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) 6 Typematic Delay (Msec) 250 Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Boot Other Device [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable selection of other boot device. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] Quick Power On Self Test [Enabled] This field speeds up the Power-On-Self Test (POST) routine by skipping certain tests while booting, thereby decreasing the boot time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Halt On [All, But Keyboard] Sets the system to halt on errors according to the system functions specified in each option. Configuration options: [All Errors] [No Errors] [All, But Keyboard] [All , But Diskette] [All, But Disk/Key] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] Boot Up Floppy Seek [Disabled] When enabled, the BIOS will seek the floppy disk drive to determine whether the drive has 40 or 80 tracks. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Boot Up NumLock Status [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [On] [Off]
5-42 5-42 5-42 5-42 5-42 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup The items Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) and Typematic Delay Typematic Delay Typematic Delay Typematic Delay Typematic Delay become configurable only when the item Typematic Setting is enabled. Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) [6] Allows you to select the rate at which character repeats when you hold a key. Configuration options: [6] [8] [10] [12] [15] [20] [24] [30] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Typematic Delay (Msec) [250] Allows you to set the delay before key strokes begin to repeat. Configuration options: [250] [500] [750] [1000] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Typematic Rate Setting [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the keyboard typematic rate setting. Set to [Enabled] to configure the Type Rate and Type Delay items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-43 5-43 5-43 5-43 5-43 F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.6.5 5.6.5 5.6.5 5.6.5 5.6.5 Security Security Security Security Security Select Menu Item Specific Help Select your boot device priority. Security Supervisor Password Clear User Password Clear Password Check [Setup] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] Supervisor Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] User Password [Clear] These fields allow you to set passwords: To set a password: 1. Select an item then press <Enter>. 2. Type in a password using a combination of a maximum of eight (8) alpha-numeric characters, then press <Enter>. 3. When prompted, confirm the password by typing the exact characters again, then press <Enter>. The password field setting is changed to Set Set Set Set Set . To clear the password: 1. Select the password field and press <Enter> twice. The following message appears: 2. Press any key to continue. The password field setting is changed to Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear . PASSWORD DISABLED !!! Press any key to continue...
5-44 5-44 5-44 5-44 5-44 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup A note about passwords A note about passwords A note about passwords A note about passwords A note about passwords The Supervisor password is required to enter the BIOS Setup program preventing unauthorized access. The User password is required to boot the system preventing unauthorized use. Forgot your password? Forgot your password? Forgot your password? Forgot your password? Forgot your password? If you forget your password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. The RAM data containing the password information is powered by the onboard button cell battery. If you need to erase the CMOS RAM, refer to section âÂÂ4.2 Jumpersâ for instructions. Password Check Password Check Password Check Password Check Password Check This field requires you to enter the password before entering the BIOS setup or the system. Select [Setup] to require the password before entering the BIOS Setup. Select [System] to require the password before entering the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [System]
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 5-45 5-45 5-45 5-45 5-45 F1:Help âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Item -/ : Change Value F5: Setup Defaults ESC: Exit âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ : Select Menu Enter: Select Sub-menu F10: Save and Exit Phoenix-Award BIOS CMOS Setup Utility Main Advanced Power Boot Exit 5.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the BIOS setup default settings, save or discard any changes you made, or exit the Setup utility. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F10>, to save your changes to CMOS before exiting the Setup utility. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to save and exit ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option then press <Enter> if you wish to exit the Setup utility without saving your changes. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to discard your changes and exit ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Select this option then press <Enter>, or simply press <F5>, to load the optimized values for each of the Setup menu items. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to load the default values ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu Select Menu Item Specific Help This option save data to CMOS and exits the setup menu. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Discard Changes
5-46 5-46 5-46 5-46 5-46 Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Chapter 5: BIOS setup Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Select this option to discard the changes that you made, and restore the previously saved values. When a confirmation window appears (with a blinking [Y]): ⢠press <Enter> to discard any changes, and load the previously saved values ⢠type [N], then press <Enter>, or simply press <Esc>, to cancel the command and return to the Exit menu
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This chapter provides information on how to create a RAID set and how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone server supports. Chapter 6 Driver installation
6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID configurations The system motherboard comes with the NVIDIA CK-04 RAID controller that allows you to configure Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ6.2 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 6.1.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive. Refer to the RAID controllers user manual on the support CD for detailed information on RAID configurations. 6.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.2 6.1.2 RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility RAID configuration utility You can create a RAID set using the utility embedded in each RAID controller. For example, you can use the NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA î î î î î RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility i f y o u installed SATA hard disk drives on the SATA connectors supported by the NVIDIA CK-04 Southbridge. Refer to the succeeding sections for details on how to enter the RAID configuration utility.
6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1.3 6.1.3 6.1.3 6.1.3 6.1.3 NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA NVIDIA î î î î î RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations RAID configurations The motherboard includes a high performance SATA RAID controller integrated in the NVIDIA î CK-04 chip. The RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 1 0, and JBOD using four independent Serial ATA channels. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST. 2. Go to the Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced menu, select Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device Onboard Device , then press <Enter>. 3. Select the NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration NVRAID Configuration option, then press <Enter>. 4. Select the RAID Enabled RAID Enabled RAID Enabled RAID Enabled RAID Enabled item, then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 5. Select [Enabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] [Enabled] from the options, then press <Enter>. 6. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. ⢠For detailed information on the NVIDIA î RAID configuration, refer to the âÂÂNVIDIA î RAID UserâÂÂs Manualâ in the system or motherboard support CD. ⢠The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only, and may not exactly match the items on your screen. Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA Entering the NVIDIA î î î î î RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility RAID Utility To enter the NVIDIA î RAID Utility: 1. Restart the computer. 2. During POST, press <F10> to display the utility main menu. [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Define a New Array - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Block: Optimal Free Disks Array Disks Loc Disk Model Name Loc Disk Model Name 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Add 2.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Del
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-5 At the bottom section of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select menu options. Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) To create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array menu, select RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode , then press <Enter>. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select Striping Striping Striping Striping Striping , then press <Enter>. Mirroring Striping Stripe Mirroring Spanning [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup The navigation keys vary depending on the menu level or option. 3. Press <TAB> to move to the Striping Block Striping Block Striping Block Striping Block Striping Block option, then press <Enter>. 4. Use the up or down arrow keys to select the stripe block size appropriate to your drive usage, then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 8KB to 128KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB. You must choose the stripe size value based on the projected drive usage. For low disk usage, select 8 KB/16 KB. For typical disk usage, select 64 KB. Select 128KB for performance disk usage. 8K â â â â â 16K 32K 64K 128K Optim â â â â â TIP. TIP. TIP. TIP. TIP. For server systems, use of a lower array block size is recommended. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance.
6-6 6-6 6-6 6-6 6-6 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. Press <TAB> to move to the Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks section. 6. Highlight the hard disk drives that you want to add in the RAID set, then press the right arrow key to select. The selected hard disk drives appear in the Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks section. Repeat the process until all desired hard disk drives are added. Clear disk data? [Y] YES [N] Cancel [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Define a New Array - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Block: Optimal Free Disks Array Disks Loc Disk Model Name Loc Disk Model Name 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Add 2.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Del 7. After selecting the hard disk drives, press <F7> to create the RAID 0 set. A pop-up window appears. 8. Press <Y> to delete all data from the hard disk drives, or <N> to continue creating the RAID set without deleting the data on the disks. You will lose all data on the drives if you clear the disk data! 9. The utility displays the created RAID 0 set. Press <Ctrl X> to save your settings and exit the utility. [Ctrl-X]Exit [ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ ]Select [B]Set Boot [N]New Array [ENTER]Detail NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 6-7 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) To create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array menu, select RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode RAID Mode , then press <Enter>. A pop-up menu appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring Mirroring , then press <Enter>. Mirroring Striping Stripe Mirroring Spanning 5. Press <TAB> to move to the Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks Free Disks section. 6. Highlight the hard disk drives that you want to add in the RAID set, then press the right arrow key to select. The selected hard disk drives appear in the Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks Array Disks section. Repeat the process until all desired hard disk drives are added. Clear disk data? [Y] YES [N] Cancel 7. After selecting the hard disk drives, press <F7> to create the RAID 1 set. A pop-up window appears. 8. Press <Y> to delete all data from the hard disk drives and continue creating the RAID set. Press <N> to backup exisitng data to a target hard disk drive. You will lose all data on the drives if you clear the disk data! 9. The utility displays the created RAID 1 set. Press <Ctrl X> to save your settings and exit the utility.0 [F6] Back [F7] Finish [TAB] Navigate [ âÂÂâÂÂ] Select [ENTER] Popup NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Define a New Array - RAID Mode: Mirroring Striping Block: Optimal Free Disks Array Disks Loc Disk Model Name Loc Disk Model Name 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Add 2.0.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 2.1.M XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX [ â ] Del
6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 6-8 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set Rebuilding a RAID set To rebuild a RAID set: 1. From the Array List Array List Array List Array List Array List , use the up or down arrow keys to select the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <Enter>. The RAID set details appear. 2. Press <R>. 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a the RAID set you want to rebuild, then press <F7>. A confirmation message appears. 4. Press <Enter> to start rebuilding the array, or <Esc> to cancel. The Array List Array List Array List Array List A r r a y L i s t screen displays the RAID set after rebuilding. Rebuild array? [Enter] OK [Esc] Cancel [Ctrl-X]Exit [ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ ]Select [B]Set Boot [N]New Array [ENTER]Detail NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG No 3 Healthy NVIDIA MIRRORING XXX.XXG [ âÂÂâ ] Select [F6] Back [F7] Finish Array 1 : NVIDIA MIRROR XXX.XXG - Array Detail - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Width: 1 Striping Block: 64K Adapt Channel M/S Index Disk Model Name Capacity 2 1 Master 0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 1 0 Master 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-9 Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array To delete a RAID array: 1. From the Array List Array List Array List Array List Array List , use the up or down arrow keys to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Enter>. The RAID set details appear. [R] Rebuild [D] Delete [C] Clear Disk [ENTER] Return Array 1 : NVIDIA MIRROR XXX.XXG - Array Detail - RAID Mode: Mirroring Striping Width: 1 Striping Block: 64K Adapt Channel M/S Index Disk Model Name Capacity 2 1 Master 0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 1 0 Master 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 2. When the array details appear, press <D> to delete the RAID set. A confirmation message appears. 3. Press <Y> to delete the array, or press <N> to cancel. 4. The Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array Define a New Array menu appears when you press <Y>. Create a new RAID set following the instructions in the previous sections.. [R] Rebuild [D] Delete [C] Clear Disk [ENTER] Return NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG No 3 Healthy NVIDIA MIRRORING XXX.XXG Delete this array? [Y] Yes [N] Cancel You will lose all data on the drives if you delete a disk array!
6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 2. When the array details appear, select the hard disk drive you want to clear, then press <C>. A confirmation message appears. Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data Clearing the disk data You will lose all data when you clear a disk! To clear the disk data: 1. From the Array List Array List Array List Array List Array List , use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID set, then press <Enter>. The RAID set details appear. [Ctrl-X]Exit [ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ âÂÂâ ]Select [B]Set Boot [N]New Array [ENTER]Detail NVIDIA RAID Utility Oct 5 2004 - Array List - Boot Id Status Vendor Array Model Name No 4 Healthy NVIDIA STRIPING XXX.XXG No 3 Healthy NVIDIA MIRRORING XXX.XXG [R] Rebuild [D] Delete [C] Clear Disk [ENTER] Return Array 1 : NVIDIA MIRROR XXX.XXG - Array Detail - RAID Mode: Striping Striping Width: 1 Striping Block: 64K Adapt Channel M/S Index Disk Model Name Capacity 2 1 Master 0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 1 0 Master 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX.XXGB 3. Press <Y> to clear the disk data, or press <N> to cancel.Press <C> to clear disk. The following confirmation message appears. Clear disk data? [Y] Yes [N] Cancel
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-11 6.2 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. You can create a RAID driver disk in DOS (using the Makedisk application in the support CD) or in Windows î environment. To create a RAID driver disk in DOS environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. Restart the computer, then enter the BIOS Setup. 3. Select the optical drive as the first boot priority to boot from the support CD. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. 4. When prompted, press any key to boot from the support CD. The Makedisk menu appears. 5. Place a blank, high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. Loading FreeDOS FAT KERNEL GO! Press any key to boot from CDROM... 1) FreeDOS command prompt 2) Run AWDFlash to Flash BIOS 3 ) Create Silicon Image SATA SoftRAID 5 miniport for Windows driver 4 ) Create nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver for Win2000 32 bit driver 5 ) Create nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver for WinX P 32 bit driver 6 ) Create nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver for Win2003 32 bit driver Please choose 1 ~ 6 6. Type the number before the option you like to select, then press <Enter>. For example, if you want to create an nVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID driver disk for a 32-bit Windows 2000 system, press <4>, then press <Enter>. 7. The RAID drivers are copied to the floppy disk. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. When you insert a floppy disk with data, the utility erases all the data before copying the RAID drivers.
6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation To create a RAID driver disk in Windows î environment: 1. Place the motherboard support CD in the optical drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, click NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver Disk Driver Disk Driver Disk Driver Disk Driver Disk t o create an nVIDIA nForce RAID driver disk. To install the RAID driver: 1. Install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. During installation, the computer prompts you to press the F6 F6 F6 F6 F 6 key if you are installing a third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6>, then insert the RAID driver disk to the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow screen instructions to install the RAID drivers.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-13 6-13 6.3 LAN driver installation This section provides instructions on how to install the Broadcom î Gigabit LAN controller drivers on a Windows î 2000/XP OS. To install the LAN controller drivers: 1. Restart the computer, then log on with Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator Administrator privileges. 2. Insert the motherboard/system support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Windows î automatically detects the LAN controllers and displays a New Hardware Found New Hardware Found New Hardware Found New Hardware Found New Hardware Found window. Click Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel t o close this window. ⢠If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. 3. Click the Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet option to begin installation. 4. Click Next Next Next Next Next when the InstallShield Wizard window appears. Follow screen instructions to continue installation.
6-14 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-14 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.4 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 6.4.1 6.4.1 6.4.1 6.4.1 6.4.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers D r i v e r s menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for updates.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-15 6.4.2 6.4.2 6.4.2 6.4.2 6.4.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. The screen display and driver options vary under dif ferent operating system versions. NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional NVIDIA CK8-04 Professional Installs the driver for the NVIDIA CK8-04 chip. Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet Installs the Broadcom 5751 NetXtreme Gigabit Ethernet driver. See page 6-13 for details. Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Silicon SATARAID miniport Installs the driver for the Silicon Image SATA RAID controller. Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Broadcom NetXtreme Software Installs the Broadcom NetXtreme software application. Refer to the application help file for details. NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID Driver Creates a driver disk for the NVIDIA nForce(TM) RAID controller. Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Audio ALC650 Installs the drivers and utility for the onboard audio controller. See page 6-18 for details. Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Silicon SATARAID miniport Utility Installs the Silicon Image SATA RAID utility. Refer to the application help file for details.
6-16 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-16 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.4.3 6.4.3 6.4.3 6.4.3 6.4.3 Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software The Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software Management Software menu shows the available server management software applications. Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Install ASUS Network Utility Installs the ASUS Network Utility. Refer to the application help file for details. 6.4.4 6.4.4 6.4.4 6.4.4 6.4.4 Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities The Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities menu shows the available software applications for your barebone server. Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX The Microsoft DirectX î is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-17 ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 ADOBE Acrobat Reader V5.0 The Adobe Acrobat î Reader V5.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 Norton Internet Security 2005 The anti-virus utility scans, identifies, and removes computer viruses. View the online help for detailed information. Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor The Voice Editor application allows you to record and customize wave files for the ASUS POST Reporter⢠utility. Use this program to change the default vocal POST messages. See page 6-27 for details. ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Bring life to your idle screen by installing the ASUS screen saver.
6-18 6-18 6-18 6-18 6-18 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.5 Software information 6.5.1 6.5.1 6.5.1 6.5.1 6.5.1 Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel The Realtek î ALC850 AC âÂÂ97 audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software provides Jack-Sensing function (Line-In, Line-Out, Mic-In), S/PDIF out support and interrupt capability. The ALC850 also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for three ports (Line-In, Line-Out and Mic-In), eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 Audio ALC850 from the support CD that came with the system package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will find the SoundEffect icon on the taskbar. From the taskbar, double-click on the SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel Realtek Audio Control Panel . Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon Realtek SoundEffect icon The Jack-sensing and UAJ î technology features are supported on the Line-In, Line-Out, and Mic jacks only.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 Sound Effect options Sound Effect options Sound Effect options Sound Effect options Sound Effect options The Realtek î ALC850 Audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer, set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. To set the sound effect options: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect button. 2. Click the shortcut buttons to change the acoustic environment, adjust the equalizer, or set the karaoke to your desired settings. 3 . The audio settings take effect immediately after you click on the buttons. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
6-20 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-20 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation S/PDIF options S/PDIF options S/PDIF options S/PDIF options S/PDIF options The Sony/Philips Digital Interface (S/PDIF) options allows you to change your S/PDIF output settings. To set the S/PDIF options: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF button. 2. Click the option buttons to change your S/PDIF out settings. 3. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-21 6-21 Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration This option allows you to set your speaker configuration. To set the speaker configuration: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Speaker Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration Configuration button. 2. Select from the combo list box your current speaker setup, then click Auto Test Auto Test Auto Test Auto Test Auto Test t o test your settings. 3. Click the UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic UAJ Automatic button to enable or disable the Universal Audio Jack(UAJ î ) technology feature. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
6-22 6-22 6-22 6-22 6-22 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. When finished, the utility prompts the Realtek î EZ-connection dialog box showing your current audio connections. The text at the bottom of the box explains your audio connection status. An X mark denotes an incorrect connection. AI Audio feature AI Audio feature AI Audio feature AI Audio feature AI Audio feature The AI Audio feature works through the connector sensing option that allows you to check if your audio devices are connected properly. To start the connector sensing: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the Connector Sensing Connector Sensing Connector Sensing Connector Sensing Connector Sensing button. 2. Click the Bracket Bracket Bracket Bracket Bracket button to display connected audio devices. 3. Click the Option Option Option Option Option button to change sensing options. 4. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button to start connection sensing. A progress bar displays current connector sensing status. Make sure to exit all audio applications before starting this function.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-23 6-23 6-23 6-23 6-23 HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo This option shows a demo of the Head-Related Transfer Functions (HRTF). To start the HRTF demo: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo HRTF Demo button. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path or EAX settings. 3. Click the Play Play Play Play Play button to start or the Stop Stop Stop Stop S t o p button to stop. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit. 6. If there are detected problems, make sure that your audio cables are connected to the proper audio jack and repeat connector sensing. 7. Click the X X X X X button to exit EZ-connection dialog box. 8. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit audio control panel.
6-24 6-24 6-24 6-24 6-24 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation The functions of the Line Out (lime), Line In (blue), Mic (pink), Center/ Subwoofer (Yellow Orange), Rear Speaker Out (Black), and Side Speaker Out (Gray) ports on the rear panel change when you select the 4-channel, 6-channel or 8-channel audio configuration as shown in the following table. Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Yellow Orange - - Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black - Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Gray - - - Side Speaker Out Headset Headset Headset Headset Headset / 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel General settings General settings General settings General settings General settings This option shows the audio settings and allows you to change the language setting or toggle the SoundEffect icon display on the Windows taskbar. To display the general settings: 1. From the Realtek Audio Control Panel, click the General General General General General button. 2. Click the option button to enable or disable the icon display on the Windows taskbar. 3. Click the Language Language Language Language Language combo list box to change language display. 4. Click the Exit ( X X X X X ) button on the upper-right hand corner of the window to exit.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6-25 6.5.2 6.5.2 6.5.2 6.5.2 6.5.2 ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠ASUS POST Reporter⢠This motherboard includes the Winbond speech controller to support a special feature called the ASUS POST Reporterâ¢. This feature lets you hear vocal messages during POST that alerts you of system events and boot status. In case of a boot failure, you will hear the specific cause of the problem. These POST messages are customizable using the Winbond Voice Editor software that came with your package. You can record your own messages to replace the default messages. Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Vocal POST messages Following is a list of the default POST messages and the corresponding actions you can take: POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action No CPU installed ⢠Install a supported processor to the CPU socket. See section âÂÂ2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU)â for details. System failed CPU test ⢠Check the CPU if properly installed. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the ASUS contact information on the inside front cover of this user guide. System failed memory test ⢠Install supported DDR DIMMs into the memory sockets. ⢠Check if the DIMMs on the DIMM sockets are properly installed. ⢠Make sure that your DIMMs are not defective. ⢠Refer to section âÂÂ2.4 System memoryâ for instructions on installing a DIMM. System failed VGA test ⢠Install a PCI graphics card into one of the PCI slots, or a PCI Express VGA card into the PCI Express x16 slot. ⢠Make sure that your graphics card is not defective. System failed due to CPU ⢠Check your CPU overclocking settings in the BIOS setup and restore the default CPU parameters. No keyboard detected ⢠Check if your keyboard is properly connected to the purple PS/2 connector on the rear panel. ⢠See section âÂÂ2.7.1 Rear panel connectorsâ for the location of the connector. No IDE hard disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected an IDE hard disk drive to one of the IDE connectors on the motherboard.
6-26 6-26 6-26 6-26 6-26 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message POST Message Action Action Action Action Action CPU temperature too high ⢠Check if the CPU fan is working properly. CPU fan failed ⢠Check the CPU fan and make sure it turns on after you apply power to the system. ⢠Make sure that your CPU fan supports the fan speed detection function. CPU voltage out of range ⢠Check your power supply and make sure it is not defective. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âÂÂASUS contact informationâ on the inside front cover of this user guide. Computer now booting from operating ⢠No action required system You can enable or disable the ASUS POST Reporter⢠in the Speech IC Speech IC Speech IC Speech IC Speech IC Reporter Reporter Reporter Reporter Reporter item in the BIOS setup. See section 5.4.4 for details.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-27 6-27 6.5.3 6.5.3 6.5.3 6.5.3 6.5.3 Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor Winbond Voice Editor The Winbond Voice Editor software allows you to customize the vocal POST messages. You can install this application from the support CD. Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor Launching the Voice Editor You can launch the program from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor > All Programs > Winbond Voice Editor > Voice Editor . The Winbond Voice Editor screen appears. Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files Playing the default wave files To play the default wave files, simply click on a POST event on the left side of the screen, then click the Play button. Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages Default Messages POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events POST Events To avoid conflicts, do not run the Winbond Voice Editor while running the ASUS PC Probe application. The default language setting is English.
6-28 6-28 6-28 6-28 6-28 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation 3. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button from the Voice Editor main window to update the EEPROM. 4. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes t o confirm. Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language Changing the default language To change the default language: 1. Click the Load Load Load Load Load button from the Voice Editor main window. A window with the available languages appears. 2. Select your desired language, then click Open Open Open Open Open . The event messages for the language you selected appear on the Voice Editor main window. Not all events on some languages have a corresponding message due to file size constraints. The next time you boot your computer, the ASUS Post Reporter announces the messages in the selected language.
ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-29 6-29 Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages Customizing your POST messages The Voice Editor application allows you to record your own POST messages if your language is not supported or if you wish to to replace the pre-installed wave files. To customize your POST messages. 1. Launch the Voice Editor application and note the list of POST events on the leftmost column of the screen. 2. Prepare your message for each event. 3. Use a recording software (e.g. Windows î Recorder) to record your messages, then save the messages as wave files (.WAV). 4. From the Voice Editor screen, click the Add Add Add Add Add button to display the Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File Add Wave File window. 5. Copy the wave files that you recorded to the database, then close the window when done. ⢠The total compressed size for all the wave files must not exceed 1Mbit, so keep your messages as short as possible. ⢠To keep file sizes small, save your files at a low quality. For example, use 8-bit, mono quality at 22Khz sampling rate. ⢠Create a separate folder for your wave files so you can locate them easily.
6-30 6-30 6-30 6-30 6-30 Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation Chapter 6: Driver installation If you receive an error message telling you that the files exceed the total allowable size, do any or all of the following: ⢠Shorten your messages. ⢠Save the wave files at a lower quality ⢠Do not include seldom-used events like FDD Detection, IDE HDD Detection, etc. 6. Select a POST event on the Voice Editor main window, then click the Edit Edit Edit Edit Edit button. The Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor Event Sound Editor window appears. 7. Locate and select your wave file for the event, then click on the arrow opposite Voice1. The file you select appears on the space next to it. 8. Click OK OK OK OK O K to return to the Voice Editor main window. 9. Do steps 6 to 8 for the other events. 10. When done, click Save Save Save Save S a v e. A window appears prompting you to save your configuration. 11. Type a file name with an .flh .flh .flh .flh .flh extension, then click Save. 12. Click the Write Write Write Write Write button to compress the file and copy into the EEPROM. 13. Click Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes o n the confirmation window that appears.
3-1 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 This appendix contains the power supply specifications and provides a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone server. Appendix Reference information
Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A.1 600 W single power supply A.1.1 A.1.1 A.1.1 A.1.1 A.1.1 General description General description General description General description General description The 600 W SSI-type single power supply with universal AC input includes PFC and ATX-compliant output cables and connectors. The power supply has nine plugs labeled P1 to P11 (no P3). Take note of the devices to which you should connect the plugs. P9 P9 P9 P9 P9 P11 P11 P11 P11 P11 P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P10 P10 P10 P10 P10 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P P P P P 2 2 2 2 2 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P9 P9 P9 P9 P 9 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the second SCSI/SATA backplane P10 P10 P10 P10 P 1 0 Peripheral device (available); connect this to the second SCSI/SATA backplane P2 P2 P2 P2 P 2 Motherboard 8-pin 12V AUX power connector P1 P1 P1 P1 P 1 Motherboard 24-pin ATX power connector P5 P5 P5 P5 P 5 Peripheral device (optical drive) P6 P6 P6 P6 P 6 Peripheral device (available) P7 P7 P7 P7 P 7 Auxiliary power connector; connect this to the first SCSI/SATA backplane P4 P4 P4 P4 P 4 Floppy disk drive P11 P11 P11 P11 P 1 1 Power SMBus connector
A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 A.1.2 A.1.2 A.1.2 A.1.2 A.1.2 Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications Specifications DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics DC Output characteristics Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Voltage Max (A) Max (A) Max (A) Max (A) Max (A) 3.33V 24 5V 24 12V 43 -12V 0.5 -5V 0.5 5VSB 2.0 Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Characteristics Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Input Voltage Range Normal Range 110 to 127 V ~ 10 A Auto Range 200 to 240 V ~ 5 A Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range Input Frequency Range 5 0 H z t o 6 0 H z
Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A-4 A.2 Simple fixes The power LED on the The power LED on the The power LED on the The power LED on the The power LED on the server or on the monitor server or on the monitor server or on the monitor server or on the monitor server or on the monitor do not light up do not light up do not light up do not light up do not light up 1. Check if the power cable is properly connected to the power connector in the system rear panel. 2. Make sure that the power cables are connected to a grounded power outlet. 3. Press the power button to make sure that the system is turned on. The keyboard does not The keyboard does not The keyboard does not The keyboard does not The keyboard does not work work work work work Check if the keyboard cable is properly connected to the PS/2 keyboard port. The mouse does not work The mouse does not work The mouse does not work The mouse does not work The mouse does not work Check if the mouse cable is properly connected to the mouse port. The system does not The system does not The system does not The system does not The system does not perform power-on self perform power-on self perform power-on self perform power-on self perform power-on self tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was tests (POST) after it was turned on turned on turned on turned on turned on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed the DIMMs the system supports. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. Problem Problem Problem Problem Problem Action Action Action Action Action Some problems that you may encounter are not due to defects on the system or the components. These problems only requires simple troubleshooting actions that you can perform by yourself.
A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 A-5 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 ASUS TW510-E2 Problem Problem Problem Problem Problem Action Action Action Action Action The system continuously The system continuously The system continuously The system continuously The system continuously beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned beeps after it was turned on on on on on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed supported DIMMs. 2. Make sure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system The message âÂÂNon-system disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ disk or disk errorâ appears appears appears appears appears 1. Check if a bootable HDD is active. 2. Check if the HDDs are properly installed. Network connection not Network connection not Network connection not Network connection not Network connection not available available available available available 1. Make sure that the network cable is connected to the LAN port on the rear panel. 2. Make sure that you have installed the LAN drivers from the support CD.
Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information Appendix: Reference information A-6 A-6 A-6 A-6 A-6